JP6652728B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko related to gaming machines.

  At present, the most popular pachinko gaming machines are called "special symbols" (or main gaming symbols) on a display unit such as a 7-segment display when a game ball enters the starting port (start chucker). Special game state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal game state when the special symbol has a specific mode (for example, “7”). (A so-called attacker) is a model of a type that shifts to a game that is released under predetermined conditions (a so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of special symbols directly connected to the interests of the player, apart from the above-mentioned "special symbols", it is referred to as "decorative symbols" for effects for enhancing the interest of the game. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decoration symbol also starts to change accordingly, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the decoration symbol is also changed to a predetermined mode (for example, ("777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by the stop of the decorative symbol in the predetermined mode.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to pachinko gaming machines of this type, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to make efforts to enhance the overall appeal, including the variation of the symbols, and to provide high interest. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, in a situation where the variable display of the "special symbol" cannot be started, a function for suspending the variable display is provided in response to a game ball entering the starting opening, and an effect related to the suspended display is performed. One of them is a technique for improving the interest of the game by configuring the game to obtain.

JP 2009-136435 A JP 2014-150802 A JP 2014-150882 A JP 2014-213021A JP 2014-233439 JP-A-2015-77173

  However, since there have been many such gaming machines, there is a problem that the development of a model that realizes a more novel gaming property is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main game section for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects,
A sub-game unit for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
A random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port,
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining unit, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage unit that controls generation of a hold is provided.
In the case where the change display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information is changed by the identification information display unit based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the identification information after being displayed,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, comprising effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold has occurred and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, can be displayed on the effect display unit. There is a plurality of types of display modes of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image can be changed during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. ,
In the case where there is a certain hold and the first digest hold which satisfies the variable display start condition of the identification information earlier than the certain hold, the first variable display condition of the identification information related to the first digest hold is satisfied During the fluctuation display of the identification information at the time, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that foretells the future special game execution expectation due to the certain hold,
The degree of expectation that the type of the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is changed is a look-ahead effect during the variable display of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the first digestion hold is satisfied. It is configured to be different depending on the execution status and / or the execution content of the look-ahead effect ,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, it is configured to be able to execute a special effect that is an effect that suggests or informs that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed,
It is configured such that the variable display time of the identification information when the number of holdings when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the hold number A can be X seconds, and when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied. When the number of holds is the hold number B smaller than the hold number A, the change display time of the identification information can be set to Y seconds longer than X seconds,
During the variable display of the identification information for X seconds when the number of holds when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the number of holds A, a certain type of variable right image corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute special effects,
During the variable display of the identification information for Y seconds when the number of holds when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the hold number B, the remaining time of the variable display of the identification information is X seconds or more. Thus, even if a new hold occurs, the certain type of special effect is not performed on the variable right image corresponding to the new hold, but the following variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the new suspension can be changed as an opportunity .
<Appendix>
In addition, although another aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this another aspect,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
In the case where there is a certain hold and the first digestion hold which is a hold that satisfies the identification information change display start condition earlier than the certain hold, the change display start condition of the identification information related to the first digestion hold is provided. During the fluctuation display of the identification information when satisfying the above, it is possible to execute a hold look-ahead effect that foretells a future special game execution expectation due to the remaining suspension during the fluctuation display of the identification information,
As the hold look-ahead effect, the hold look-ahead effect A, the hold look-ahead effect B in which the effect execution mode is different from the hold look-ahead effect A, and the hold look-ahead effect C in which the hold look-ahead effect A and the hold look-ahead effect B have different effect execution modes. And at least
The pending look-ahead effect A and the pending look-ahead effect B are configured not to be executed simultaneously,
The prefetch effect B and the prefetch effect C are configured to be able to be simultaneously executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, further novel gaming properties can be realized in a gaming machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prize determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prize determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the occurrence-pending content transmission process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of digestion hold content transmission processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the pending simultaneous change management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prize determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a giant hold prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the skewering hold pre-read determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the hold split prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the first main game prefetch pending content determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prefetching effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is an illustration of a simultaneous change change effect execution on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a view showing an image of execution of a prefetching effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the limited frequency change mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the second main game prize winning prefetch determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the occurrence-pending content transmission processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of digestion hold content transmission processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the initialization command transmission determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prize determination process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 64 is a first example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 65 is a second example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 66 is a third example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 67 shows a prefetch effect change example 4 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 68 is an example 5 of changing the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 69 is a modification example 6 of the holding look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 70 is a seventh example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 71 shows a prefetch effect change example 8 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 72 shows a ninth modification example of the pending look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 73 is a tenth modification example of the pending look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 74 is an example 11 of a change of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 75 shows a twelfth modification of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 76 shows a thirteenth modification of the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 77 is an example 14 of changing the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 shows a prefetch effect change example 15 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 79 shows a prefetch effect change example 16 on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is a modification example 17 of the holding look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is a modification example 18 of the pending look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example 19 of changing the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is an example 20 of changing the reserved look-ahead effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.

Forms for implementation

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entering a ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The “open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = no winning state. It becomes an easy state. In addition, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state) (A so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the retracted state = the winning state is not easy. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining a game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense. Soft random numbers as random numbers and pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the result of a game, specifically, a “winning random number (a random number for winning or losing lottery)” related to the transition of a special game, and a variation mode (or variation time) of an identification symbol are determined. "Variation mode determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "symbol determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determining random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability varying game) after a special game, and the like. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be indicated in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. Is called one random number (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... Is referred to as one random number). . Further, for example, one kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special game state, and a transition to the special game state from a non-probability varying game state in which a lottery probability is a predetermined value. A probability variation game state in which a lottery probability is high, a transition to a special game, an auxiliary game state in which there is assistance for winning a prize in a starting opening which is a trigger for a lottery (a so-called ordinary symbol time-saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting opening. In such a case, the opening period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, and the time for reporting the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short. “Average value is uniform regardless of the number of reservations” means that the fluctuation time is selected without depending on the number of reservations. Other specified contents include, for example, (1) loss-related In the stop symbol “HA”, a first difference is generated between the average value of the fluctuation time in the number of holdings a and the average value of the fluctuation time in the number of holdings b that is larger than the number of holdings a. In the symbol “HB”, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time with the number of reservations a and the average value of the fluctuation time with the number of reservations b, or the second difference is larger than the first difference, Is smaller than the first difference. (2) At the time of the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss with the number of reservations c (for example, 4 reservations), it is allocated to all the variation modes that can be selected. Random number range assigned to the most easily selected variation mode in the random number range The occupation ratio is assumed to be the occupancy ratio α, and when the stop symbol “HB” is related to the loss with the number of reservations c (for example, 4 reservations), it is most likely to be selected in the random number range assigned to all selectable variation modes. When the occupancy rate β is the occupation ratio of the random number range assigned to the variation mode, the occupancy rate α is higher than the occupancy rate β (that is, the variation mode that is most easily selected is intensively selected). Value).

  The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 type multifunction peripheral) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the present invention is applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as the first type, the second type, the third type, and the general electric machine) is also within the scope. . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on / off a flag, the name of a unit responsible for the processing of each step, and the like are described as an example. It is not limited to the following embodiments. In addition, it should not be understood that the above-described embodiments and modified examples are applied to specific ones in a limited manner, and any combination may be used. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification example and another modification example are described independently, the modification example It should be understood that combinations of the modifications and the other modifications are also described. In the present embodiment, a lottery table and a reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (schematic) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine frames and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing a pachinko gaming machine at a position where the pachinko gaming machine is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the firing rail, extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22, and the like. The lower ball dish D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, for example, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, a plurality of game nails and a mechanism such as a windmill (not shown) and various general winning ports are provided. First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in order.

Next, the first main game start port A10 is set as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entrance ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game starting port entrance ball detecting device A11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port A10, and the first main game start indicating the entering ball when entering the ball. Generate incoming ball information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is set as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game starting port entrance ball detecting device B11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second main game starting port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entering ball when entering the ball. Generate incoming ball information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which game balls are not easily won in the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to win than in the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the second main game start port A10 has the second main game start port A10. The upper part of the game start port B10 is closed. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are both the first main game start port A10. And it is comprised so that it may be guide | induced to the 2nd main game starting port B10.

  In the present embodiment, the motorized accessory is provided on the second main game starting port B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motorized accessory is provided on the first main game starting port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged to be vertically overlapped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 is not limited to this. A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged so as to be separated from each other. In the case of such a configuration, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d may be provided. Further, a game ball flowing on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. A game ball that flows down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be configured such that it is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. Note that “easy to be guided” and “difficult to be guided” are determined, for example, by the number of entering balls when 10,000 game balls are fired on the right and left sides, respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry information indicating the entry when the ball is entered. I do. The entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (with reference to the center of the game area) is easily guided through the auxiliary game start port H10, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is formed. It is configured such that it is difficult to be guided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30), respectively.

  Next, a first special winning opening C10 and a second special winning opening C20 are arranged on the upper right of the out opening D36 so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the gaming area D30 (based on the center of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. The winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located to the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second big winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 includes a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first special winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first special winning opening C10, and the first special winning opening entry information indicating the entering when the ball enters. Generate The first special winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the first large winning opening C10 and an open state where the game ball can easily be won (No. The first winning port solenoid C13 is excited and varied). Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning port is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and is changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In this case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state where the bar-shaped member is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero-type attacker) may be used, and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the big hit symbol, and is out. The winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the mouth D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (and the second special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second special winning opening entering information indicating the entering when the ball enters. Generate The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric role-playing object C21d sets the second big winning opening C20 in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the second big winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and is variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easily won. It is not limited to. In this case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state where the bar-shaped member is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero type attacker) may be used, and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device for executing the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (a second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol. And a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display section A21h (second main game symbol hold display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of the lamps turned on is the first main game (second main game). (The number of fluctuations of the main game symbols that have not been executed). Note that the first main game symbol display section A21g (the second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbols (the second main game symbols) are "0" to "9". Is displayed with ten kinds of numbers and "-" of a loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for a player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use a symbol or the like to display the information. Also, the display of the number of holds is not limited to the configuration of four lamps, but is configured to be able to display the number of hold of up to four lamps (for example, it is configured of one lamp, Equation 1: lighting, holding number 2: low-speed blinking, holding number 3: medium-speed flashing, holding number 4: high-speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). Is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, in a case where the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a staging role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), an effect described later is used. The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, and the like. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is performed including a change display of a decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative design variations imitating a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying Although the effect display device SG is constituted by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be constituted by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and these lamps are linked to the hold lamps of the main game symbols.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lightings of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations held (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection and decoration of the effect display device SG. The game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or in an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of rendering by blinking or the like.

  Next, a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls the entire game operation such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (that is, the game). Control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that imparts interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS for mainly performing the effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to a prize in the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each winning port, and an upper ball plate D20. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. To area D30 A launching device D42 that launches balls at a time, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine, and power on / off of the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea and the like, which are switches, are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M for controlling the progress of the game and the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, and the like; And a power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG, such as fluctuation and stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and advance notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided with a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU in advance, and a CPU. A RAM is provided for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the game. Here, although not specifically shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so that an unused area is not provided in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). In addition, to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or misconduct, unused data (for example, data used for gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing during the development stage) It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when using the area of the RAM, it is preferable that the area is used by packing the area at a young address and the unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate and device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M includes the winning opening sensor Ns ｛the first main game starting opening ball detection device A11s, the second main game starting opening ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game starting opening ball detection device H11s, One big winning opening winning detection device C11s, a second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, a general winning detecting device (not shown, a general winning opening is a winning opening that has a prize ball but does not perform a symbol lottery). ｝, Drive solenoids (not shown, such as the above-described first winning port solenoid C13 and second winning port solenoid C23), information display LEDs (not shown), and the like, which are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control section SM / sub sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. Is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (command) relating to the progress state of the effect / game is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to a hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). Is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (a communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that is operable by a player and that receives a request for renting a game ball and outputs the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the winning ball payout control board, and the winning ball payout control board and the launching device (launch handle, launching motor, ball feeder) are provided. Etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball rental device R is provided as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball rental device R may be integrated with the game machine. The control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be performed in an integrated manner.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect driving devices (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and the game effect ( Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub-control unit SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, there is an advantage in that the structure is integrated such that space merits and a situation in which noise is mixed into wiring and the like can be reduced). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, such that the sound control is executed by the sub-sub-control unit SS (preferably when a sound control circuit is integrated with the VDP). Further, an electronic value may be provided without providing a physical prize ball as the prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripheral devices related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, auxiliary game peripheral devices H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect is communicably connected to a prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M. ing. The sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is also electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control section SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display section SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, and the like store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each unit that is hereinafter included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each unit to be included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the units (devices) will be described.

  First, the main control board M includes game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of a game, and progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. And the current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability-variable game state, time-reduced game state), special game state], states related to the auxiliary game. (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbols and fluctuation mode information related to main game symbols and auxiliary game symbols, on / off status of various flags, game status during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ], Etc., and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol} for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, etc. Information transmission control means MT (and untransmitted commands) for transmitting a jackpot, a loss {information on a variation mode (for example, a variation time), a start signal / state information / end signal of a special game, hold information, etc.}. Command transmission buffer MT10), and prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on winning of game balls to various winning ports. I have.

Here, the game information control unit MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the ball entry determination unit MJ10 for determining the inflow of a game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like). A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each of the random numbers based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing a ball entering each starting port during the fluctuation display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. are doing. In addition, the game progression means MP directly controls the display control means MP10 for performing control to display the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol, and the opening / closing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. A second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, a special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game more advantageous to the player than a normal game, a first main game Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, a decision is made as to which game state the current game state is to be shifted to, and the first big prize without shifting the game state (probability-variable game state, time-reduced game state). It has a small hit game control means MP40 for controlling the execution of the small hit game that can open the mouth C10, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the ball entry determining means MJ10 includes a first main game starting port entry determining means MJ11-A that determines whether a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port. A second main game start port entry judging means MJ11-B for judging whether a game ball has entered the ball B10, and an auxiliary game start port for judging whether a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10. The first ball entry determining means MJ11-C10 and the second large winning port C20 determine whether or not a game ball has entered the first large winning port C10. And a second winning port entrance determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game-side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and, in accordance with the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for obtaining a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.), and to a second main game starting port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game-side random number based on the entering of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number, etc., and an auxiliary game for determining whether or not to obtain an auxiliary game side selection random number, and obtaining the random number based on the determination result. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “65535” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random numbers need not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in a random number is a method in which values are sequentially expressed along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed ) Is determined by an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like. By obtaining a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is hardly predicted by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of using a random number used for a certain lottery to generate the next random number, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 controls the hold digestion control means MJ31 for controlling the processing relating to the hold digestion and the start of the change, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been issued. A first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for judging whether or not to temporarily store the random number based on the judgment result and holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary memory means MJ32b-A until the symbol change permission is lowered. -A and determine whether or not to temporarily store the second main game-side random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol change permission has not been lowered, and based on the result of the determination, the symbol change permission for the random number drops. The second main game symbol holding information MJ32b-B for holding the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32-B until the end, and the auxiliary game acquired when the auxiliary game symbol change permission has not been issued. Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for determining whether to temporarily store a random number or not and, based on the determination result, holding the random number in auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol change permission is lowered. And

  Here, the suspension digestion control means MJ31 includes a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether a condition for starting fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H are capable of storing up to four random numbers and combining the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of Have.

Next, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game is performed and whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is to be opened, and whether or not to open the second main game starting port electrically operated accessory B11d. Special game shift determining means MN20 (for example, turning on a hit flag internally), symbol content determining means MN40 for determining a stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number , A variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time or the like) of each symbol, and a limited frequency variation mode determining a variation mode (variation time or the like) of a main game symbol at a limited frequency described later. Means MN52. Here, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 includes a first main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / rejecting lottery on a first main game symbol, and a second main game winning / rejecting lottery means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery for a second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing success / failure lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery for the first main game symbol. A first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a winning / rejecting lottery for a second main game symbol, and a winning / non-rejection lottery for an auxiliary game symbol. , Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H which is referred to when performing the game. The limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol at the limited frequency, and includes a game state, the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game, and the like. Of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta composed of a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to, and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta at the time of the limited frequency A. A limited frequency counter AMN52c that counts the number of times the main game symbol has fluctuated since the end of the special game, and which table of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to refer to at the time of the limited frequency B Limited frequency card that counts the number of times the main game symbol has fluctuated since the end of the special game to determine A pointer BMN52c-2, has a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information relating to limited frequency (the flag on or off, etc.). When the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table) is referred to. MN51ta-B), and (1) referencing a common table to vary the selectivity of the variation mode (that is, the variation modes themselves to be selected are the same, but the selection rates are different). (2) The variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode. (3) Different variation mode ｛first main game variation mode There is a variation mode し な い that does not exist in the determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). (4) All variations that can be selected It may be configured to like is different. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, the limited frequency means the type and / or selectivity of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. (A limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is selected only during a specific fluctuation period). The limited frequency state is triggered by opening a special winning opening, stopping a symbol (a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, etc.) which triggers opening of a special winning opening, in addition to stopping a specific symbol. A predetermined number of fluctuations may be elapsed from the timing of a specific symbol stop, a fluctuation start after the stop, and the like. It should be noted that the special fluctuation pattern table includes each game state (probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state, probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability fluctuation game state The main game table 3 (referred to not only within the limited period in the current game state, but also the next big hit, small hit or specific symbol in the current game state) referred to in the state and the non-time-saving game state. This is a variation mode determination lottery table other than the variation mode determination lottery table referred to until the stop. The state of referring to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is hereinafter referred to as a limited frequency (particularly a state in which the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a state in which it is easy to open). At the time of the frequency A, the one accompanying the fact that the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is difficult to open may be referred to as the limited frequency B), the limited frequency state, the limited frequency medium, and the like.

  Here, when executing the winning / rejecting lottery based on the main game random number, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same value as one of all the hit random numbers, or If a part or all of the random numbers are continuous numbers, the main game random number is determined to be less than or equal to an upper limit value and equal to or greater than a lower limit value of the hit random number value, thereby performing a hit / fail determination. . By performing such a pass / fail determination, an accurate determination process can be performed. Conversely, when the hit determination is performed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or by comparing only with the lower limit, the end value of the random number range (for example, 0 or 102 when the random value range is 0 to 1023, 1023) is required to be a random number value, which makes it vulnerable to fraud (for example, a fraudulent act of passing a current to the main control board M, and all bits of the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a risk that it will. In this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery. In the case where a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. ｝ Because it is necessary to prevent synchronization.

  Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 determines a stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number), and a first main game symbol determining means MN41-A. The second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determining random number (second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. And an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of the winning and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the first main game normal game state Lottery table, probability change game → first main game probability change game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of the winning and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining a variation mode (variation time or the like) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. In addition, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the success / failure result / game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for gaming state, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of the win / failure / game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-H for determination includes various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time period on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for performing control to stop and display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance. It has auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for performing control to stop and display after changing the game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not a condition for performing a process of opening and closing the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is satisfied. And the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (open) time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. -B.

Next, the special game control means MP30 is a condition determining means MP31 for determining whether or not a condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and a content of the special game when the special game shift condition is satisfied. (Specifically, a special winning content, an open state, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) which are determined to be open, and a special game content determining means MP32 which is set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b; A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second big winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, a first big winning opening) C10 and the second special winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes first and second special winning opening electric auditors control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first special winning opening electric auditorium C11d and the second special winning opening electric auditorium C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls in the first winning port C10 and the second winning port C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta which is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table Is not shown in detail).

  Next, the small hitting game control means MP40 is a small hitting game timer MP41t for measuring the opening time of the first big winning opening C10 in the small hitting game, and the small hitting game related information for temporarily storing information relating to the small hitting game. And a temporary storage unit MP40b.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the end condition of the probability-variable game state is satisfied, and determines whether or not the end condition of the time-reduced game state is satisfied. , A time-saving game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the time-saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time-saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time-saving. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability to a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time shortening game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively reduced as compared with the non-time reduction game (time reduction). function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of times of change of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability fluctuation game without time reduction number of times limitation). except for). That is, the number of time savings is configured to be decremented every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). In addition, the above-mentioned probable change game termination condition determination means MP51 and the time saving game termination condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time shortening game) to a normal game at a predetermined probability every time a symbol changes. (In the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game, and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state (for example, the number of rounds, the winning number of game balls in an arbitrary round, the ON / OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) in the special game. Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20b and the current game state of the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time savings, turning on / off various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stops the first or second main game symbol currently changing (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and change mode information.

  The auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol relating to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

  Next, the gaming peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some of the peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices include a first main game peripheral device A which is a first main game side peripheral device, a second main game peripheral device B which is a second main game side peripheral device, and a first main game side device. And first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral devices H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG). Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the decoration symbols in a form synchronized with the variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of displaying stop and change of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game start port B10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of displaying a stop and a change of the second main game symbol. And

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second winning port C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of performing the following.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, a process of determining effect contents related to the effect display, and a display control process. And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub-control unit SS. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing design information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 for determining a decoration pattern change mode and a stop symbol and performing a display control processing, and a decoration holding control for managing the number of reserved decorative symbols and the hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, hold look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 for executing a hold look-ahead effect, a background effect display control means SM23 which performs a background image determination process and a display control process, a notice effect content determination process, and the like. It has a notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling the display control processing, and a reach effect display control means SM25 for controlling the determination processing of the reach effect contents and the display control processing.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, and determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol SM21n, and relates to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. A schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a schematic variable time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative symbol. ,have. Here, the design display content determining means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta which is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

  Next, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 has a schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information relating to the decoration related to the decoration.

  Next, the hold look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 includes a hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k for determining whether the hold look-ahead effect is executable, and a look-ahead related information temporary storage means SM26b for temporarily storing information related to the hold look-ahead effect. ,have.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information relating to the background effect display and the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display contents of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. Background information related information temporary storage means SM23b and a group of stay stage ｛effect system. If the stay stage is different, notice effect, background effect, reach effect, sound mode, etc. are different (or may be different). Of the｝, when staying in the “awakening stage”, the awakening stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of fluctuations of staying in the “awakening stage”, and staying in the “devil stage” of the staying stages The devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 that counts the number of times the robot stays at the “devil stage” .

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 includes a notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining display contents and a display timing of the notice effect based on information from the main control board M side, and information relating to the notice effect display. And a notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information relating to the reach effect display. And a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing.

  Further, effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in display area SG10 on effect display device SG. And control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG for displaying an image relating to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information.
).

  Note that the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS controls the sub-game control. Means (sub-main control unit) is controlled by the SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Hereinafter, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, and the like. . When details are shown in another flowchart among the processing steps, those that refer to the other flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown by rectangles in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of the gaming machine, a gaming machine with a different specification is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a sub-routine executed by the gaming machine with a different specification is included in the processing on the main side. The configuration is such that a subroutine that is not normally used is not left, and a process related to an unused subroutine that is not normally performed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initialization (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game arcade or the like. If Yes in step 1002, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side in step 1004. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (even if transmitted at the timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area on the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are abnormal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM accurately) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (the above-described RAM clearing process). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing, and a control command described later will be described. Transmission may be performed by transmission processing), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a periodic interruption (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T). As a result, when the execution-timed interrupt timing arrives, FIG. 13B is executed.
Then, the process proceeds to step 1018. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, increment processing of a random number counter) until the next regular interrupt timing is reached.

  It is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to a value at which the special game is executed (the noise or the improper behavior immediately after the start of the processing of the program). This prevents the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for performing the special game is determined.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 2B based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interruption period T arrives (for example, a hardware interruption every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a later-described electric accessory driving determination process. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning port where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH executes the processing, and executes processing for managing the result. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, and the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above-described processes to the sub-main control unit side), and executes immediately before the execution of the interrupt process. The process returns to the previous process. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the main control board M is configured to transmit the commands in the order in which the commands are determined to be transmitted (the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, at the time of an NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting port entrance ball judging means MJ11-H judges whether a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10 (flowed in, or passed in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). Is determined. In the case of Yes in Step 1104, in Step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information of the number of the holding in the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage unit MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H to determine whether or not there is a reserved ball relating to the auxiliary game symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to change the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). At the same time, with reference to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding unit MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C to determine whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and acquires the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is definitely displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition judgment means MP21-B judges whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the auxiliary game side game state (the auxiliary game time reduction flag state). A predetermined time relating to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set in the starting port electric accessory release timer MP22t-B. Seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the electric accessory opening time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily sets the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage unit MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If the answer is No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1238. If the answer is No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224. If the answer is No in Step 1206, Step 1224, Step 1230 or Step 1238, the following process Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1300).

  In the present flowchart, for convenience, the process immediately proceeds to the next step after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but is not limited thereto. In such a case, the process may be shifted to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by performing a branch process using a fixed stop display flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting port entrance determining means MJ11-A sends the first main game starting port entry information from the first main game starting port entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting port A10. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and executes the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / rejecting random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the fluctuation random number random numbers for obtaining the random numbers are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generating means having different update periods and random number ranges, respectively, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag. Is turned off. If Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1312, in Step 1314, the hold control unit MJ30 determines in advance the win / fail result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1316, the hold control unit MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated pass / fail result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1316). The data is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the flow proceeds to step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the stop symbol determined in advance is transmitted to the sub side, the result of the advance determination is the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss of the first main game. In the case of "HB" and in the case of "HB", a command related to a different stop symbol is transmitted to the sub side (as shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of stop symbols related to the loss. ing).

Next, in step 1318, the hold control unit MJ30, based on the hold information (change mode determination random number), stores the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (non-time-saving change mode group and Group) is determined in advance (refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17 for the variation mode random number separation information and the variation mode group). In this embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command relating to the occurrence of a new hold (a command to generate a hold of the first main game content determination random number, a command to change the variation mode random number information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1322. In addition, when it is configured to transmit the symbol information to the sub side as in the present embodiment, an effect indicating a big hit may be executed as an effect performed on the sub side, and in the case of such a configuration, It is desirable that the stop symbol of the main game symbol that becomes the big hit be notified to the player (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol becomes the big hit). Also, in the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310, or step 1312, the process proceeds to step 1322.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is obtained (or when a hold occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group Is determined.

  The main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the suspension occurs. The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, information on the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information on the profit mode of the main game symbol to be a big hit (number of rounds of the special game according to the main game symbol to be stopped, etc.) ), The number of holdings immediately after the holding prize (only the number of holdings on the winning side of the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side, or the number of holdings on both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side) May be configured to be able to transmit information, etc. The winning / non-permissible random number separator information includes the respective game states on the first main game side (second main game side) and the random number value (or random number value range). And the lottery results are linked and grouped One of the random number delimiter information, for example, a loss in the probability fluctuation game state or the non-probability fluctuation game state, a hit in the probability fluctuation game state or the non-probability fluctuation game state, In the case of the variable game state, it is a hit, but in the case of the non-probability variable game state, grouping such as losing can be given.

Next, in step 1322, the second main game start port ball entry judging means MJ11-B sends the second main game start port ball entry from the second main game start port ball entry detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and executes the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1324, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers, ie, a winning / rejecting random number, a symbol random number, and a variation mode random number, are obtained in the same manner as in the first main game content determining means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / rejecting random number for the first main game and the winning / rejecting random number for the second main game) Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1328, the second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1330, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag. Is turned on. In the case of Yes at step 1330, at step 1334, the hold control means MJ30 determines in advance the success / failure result and the stop symbol related to the stored suspension based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated hold success / failure result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step S1336). The data is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the flow proceeds to step 1338.

  If No in step 1330, in step 1332, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b is off. If Yes in step 1332, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process moves to step 1334.

  Next, in step 1338, the hold control unit MJ30, based on the hold information (variation mode determination random number), stores the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (non-time reduction change mode group and time reduction change mode) related to the hold. Group) is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17). Next, in step 1340, the hold control unit MJ30 sends a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (such as a command to generate a hold of the second main game content determination random number, a command to change the random number random information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

In step 1308 and step 1328, the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. Is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information relating to the “main game content determining random number” is stored in a byte storing information relating to the main game content determining random number (various timers). It is preferable that other information such as a value is not stored. (When operating another data stored in the same one byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like.) In order to prevent that from happening). In addition, regarding the winning / rejecting random number, a change in the game state (before the game state related to the hold already recorded) is obtained from the acquisition of the winning / rejecting random number to the execution of the winning / rejecting random number related to the random number. In addition to the change, there is a possibility that a change in the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, and the game state at the time of executing the random lottery according to the random number is unpredictable.) Is executed until the random number is stored. In the present embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM relating to the hold information can be transmitted only at the time of occurrence of the hold relating to the first main game in the non-time-saving game state, while in the time-reduction game state. Is configured to be transmitted only when a hold related to the second main game occurs, but regardless of the game state, regardless of whether the hold is related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game, , The command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information transmitted to the sub main control unit SM is “D000H: out, D001H: out of low accuracy, hit in high accuracy, D002H: hit in both low accuracy and high accuracy, D003H : A small hit "and a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM is" D100H: 16R probable change, D101H: 16R non-probable change, D102H: 2R probable change ". A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information transmitted to the main control unit SM is “D200H: Delimiter 1 (Group 1 in the time reduction game state, Group 1 in the non-time reduction game state, Group 1 in the limited frequency state). , D201H: Break 2 (Group 1 for time-reduced game state, Group 2 for non-time-reduced game state, group 2 for limited frequency state -Loop 1), D202H: has separated 3 (time saving game state if Group 2, Group 2 for non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and checks whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reservation of the first main game symbol) Is configured to be executed with priority given to holding the second main game symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which lotteries are randomly selected.)

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve digestion control means MJ31 determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), the main game symbol is not being changed, the main game symbol is on hold, and the small hit game is not being performed. Is a condition. Although not shown in the present example, when a fixed variation time (time for stopping and displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is confirmed) is provided, the variation start condition of the next variation is provided during the fixed variation time. May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digestion control unit MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol change is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the temporarily stored remaining information is shifted (holding processing). Next, at step 1408, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and Based on the game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (especially, the winning random determination random number), the main game symbol winning / rejecting random determination is executed.

Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit that cannot be shifted to a game state (a so-called small hit) is illustrated, but a small hit may not be generated (small hit). Further, in the present embodiment, while there are a plurality of loss symbols on the first main game side (in this example, two types of “HA” and “HB”), a single loss symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, “HC”) is configured to be present. It should be noted that the number of lost symbols on the first main game (second main game) side is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this example. The first main game side may have a single losing symbol and the second main game side may have a plurality of losing symbols, or the first main game side and the second main gaming side may have a plurality of losing symbols. ). Further, in the present example, the loss pattern on the first main game side is configured such that the ratio of “HA” is higher than the ratio of “HB”, but the present invention is not limited to this (for example, “HB”). The ratio may be configured to be higher than the ratio of “HA”, or these may be equivalent.)

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) sets the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination). With reference to the lottery table MN41ta-B), the stop symbols related to the main game symbols are determined based on the result of the main game symbol success / failure lottery and the first main game content decision random number (the second main game content decision random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). And temporarily store them in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “3A / 4A / 5A / 7A / 9A” and “3B / 4B / 5B. 7B "), one main game symbol is determined as a big hit symbol. The number of special game rounds and the opening time of the special winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are 3A, 3B, and 4B for the 2R short opening big hit (the opening time of the big winning opening is compared to the long opening big hit). 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B are 4R long open jackpots (big hits where the opening time of the special winning opening is longer than the short open jackpot), 7A and 7B Is a 16R-length open jackpot (a jackpot in which the opening time of the special winning opening is longer than the short open jackpot). The types of the random number value and the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the present embodiment, there are two types of the loss symbol on the first main game side (“HA” and “HB”). ), And one type (one type of “HC”) is provided on the second main game side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the first main game side and the second main game side A plurality of losing symbols may be provided, and the losing symbols on both the first main game side and the second main game side may be configured to be one type.

  Next, in step 1412, the first main game change mode determining means MN51-A (second main game change mode determining means MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and It is determined whether the A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination process described below. Move to step 1418. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1414, the first main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-A (the second main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-B) sets the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. To determine whether the limited frequency B flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game fluctuation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process described later. Move to step 1418. Also, in the case of No in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game change mode determining means MN51-A (the second main game change mode determining means MN51-B) sets the first main game change mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol win / fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (Especially, the variation mode lottery random numbers), the variation modes of the main game symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of a first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (a second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) (note that the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. In this figure, not only the main game table 3 but also the limited frequency table are shown at the same time, but this will be described later). As shown in the drawing, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a variation mode (variation time) of a main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value can be determined based on a result of winning or losing a lottery of the main game symbol and a main game time reduction flag state. Have been. For example, when the winning or losing result of the main game symbol is a hit with respect to a certain random number value, the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is likely to be determined, and the main game time reduction flag is on (the time reduction game). The state) is configured so that a fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol change time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long. {Symbol change on the second main game side} Is executed so that it is advantageous for the player, the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, so that the second main game side is likely to be held (which is advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port of the first main game side and the starting port of the second main game side cannot be distinguished from each other in order to construct a situation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (especially, FIG. 15), in the present example, with respect to the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, the success / failure lottery result is lost and the determined symbol (at the time of holding digestion). When the symbol to be stopped is "HA", a variation mode of a short time (in this example, the variation time is 15 seconds or less) is likely to be selected (that is, an effect having a relatively low big hit expectation is selected). Easy). On the other hand, in the present example, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the determined symbol is more relative than when the determined symbol is “HA”. It is easy to select a variation mode that is a long time (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation), and to select the variation time. The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode of the first main game side, in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is "HB", the determined symbol is more than when the determined symbol is "HA". It is configured such that a predetermined fluctuation mode of a long time (for example, a fluctuation mode of 120 seconds) is easily selected. It should be noted that a plurality of types of stop symbols related to the loss on the second main game side may be configured. In such a case, the above-described configuration (the configuration relating to “HA” and “HB”) is replaced by the second main game. It may be applied to a stop symbol related to a loss on the game side.

  Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN sets the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage sections MB11b-C. , The information about the determined main game symbol such as the fluctuation mode information and the command related to the current game state) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM by the processing). Next, in step 1420, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first / second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. I do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the fluctuation display of the main game symbols is started according to the fluctuation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Move to step 1428.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol change is finished to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). The change display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1436, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1438, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, if No in step 1436, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. If Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1550. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1440, the processing shifts to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in the present embodiment, the limited frequency A is the second main game start, as described above). The limited frequency is accompanied by the fact that the mouth-powered accessory B11d is in a state of being easily opened.) First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and determines whether the counter value is a continuity value (a state in which the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is easy to open = time reduction game). In this example, it is determined whether or not the values are 41 and 1). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1), and determines the main game side random number,
On the basis of the result of the lottery, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1458. Here, the continuation availability value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c at which the time reduction game state can end, and in the present embodiment, the number of time savings that can be given after the end of the special game is 20 or 60 times. The counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c becomes a continuation possibility value before the 20th and 60th fluctuation starts after the end of the special game.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is a continuation possibility value (41 or 1 in this example), the limited frequency table Reference is made to A-1.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2) to determine the main game side random number, As a result, based on the stop symbol related to the main game symbol,
A variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the flow proceeds to step 1458.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when the limited frequency counter A flag is ON and the limited frequency counter value is other than the continuability value (41 or 1 in this example), the limited frequency Reference is made to Table A-2.

  Next, in step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1460, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and performs the next process (step 1418). Processing). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1460, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1418).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (the limited frequency B is, as described above, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d). Is a limited frequency that is difficult to open.) First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table B) to change the main game side random number, the winning / rejecting lottery result, and the stop symbol related to the main game symbol. Based on this, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined. Next, in step 1504, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 by one. Next, step 1
In 506, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency change mode determining means MN52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and performs the next processing (step 1418). Processing). Note that also in the case of No in step 1506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1418).

  Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table B is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is on.

Here, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information is determined for a certain random value (or a random value range). The variation mode random number delimiter information is provided in each of a table at the time of a hit on the first main game side (at the time of loss) and a table at the time of a hit at the second main game side (at the time of loss). More specifically,
At the time of the loss on the second main game side, the main game symbol is divided into two segments of segment 1 and segment 2 (the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is segment 1, and the variation time of the main game symbol is The variation mode that can be the longest is the partition 2), and is divided into three partitions when the first main game side hits and when the second main game side hits (the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is the shortest). The variation mode that can be the time is in segment 1, the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol is the longest is segment 3), and the four segments from segment 1 to segment 4 at the time of the loss on the first main game side. (The fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest time is segment 1 and the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol can be the longest is segment 4).

  Further, the main game time reduction flag is turned on / off, and whether the table to be referred to is a normal (non-restricted frequency) variation mode determination table or a restricted frequency table, a restricted frequency flag (restricted frequency A flag or The on / off of the limited frequency B flag (further, regarding the limited frequency A flag, whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter A is a predetermined value) {}, the random number value of the variation time and the variation mode group The range (for example, the range of the random number value is different even for the same group 1) is configured to be different, and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation according to the game state is performed. The aspect group is configured to be able to be derived on the sub side. That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the time of the hold, the change mode group scheduled at the time of the hold and the change mode group executed at the time of the hold may be different. (For example, at the time of occurrence of the hold, the variation mode group was scheduled to be Group 1 because of the non-time shortening game state, but when the hold was completed, the actual variation mode group became Group 2 because of the time reduction game state. However, with respect to the variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the game statuses, when the sub mode receives the variation mode random number delimiter information (the subsequent game status) Without considering the transition), it is possible to normally execute a so-called pending look-ahead effect. In this embodiment, “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 means that the variation time and the variation mode of the table contents are common, but (1) the variation mode is different and the variation time value is different. Are the same, (2) the effect mode to be executed is the same, and (3) the same effect mode regardless of the game state (for example, regardless of the game state such as the probability change game state or the non-probability change game state). The processing in the main control board M (allocation of variable pattern numbers, etc.) is different, but the fact that the production mode is substantially the same may be defined as “common”. Further, the configuration may be such that the candidates for the variation mode and / or the number of candidates that can be selected are different depending on the stop symbol (determined symbol). The variation mode random number delimiter information in FIGS. 14 to 17 is determined based on whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and whether the result of the lottery is a hit or a loss. Although it is configured to form different variation mode random number delimiter information, the present invention is not limited to this. Whether the variation is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, and whether the result of the lottery is a hit It may be configured to form one piece of variation mode random number delimiter information including whether or not there is a loss.

Further, as shown in the figure, the present example is configured such that the fluctuation time can be different depending on the number of holds. For example, regarding the first main game symbol fluctuation in the non-time shortening game state, when the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HA”, the content of the variation mode determination table referred to according to the number of suspensions on the first main game side (The contents of the variation mode determination table referred to when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3 are changed). In other words, when the winning / falter lottery result is a loss time, if the determined symbol is “HA”, the fluctuation time (and the production mode) may differ depending on the number of holds at the start of the fluctuation. ) May be uncertain, while the determination symbol when the winning / losing lottery result is a loss is “HB”, the variation time (and the production mode) ) Can be determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the number of holds to be used as a reference for switching the content of the fluctuation mode determination table can be changed as appropriate (for example, 0 or 1).
, Two, three, or four, zero, one, two, three, etc.). Further, in the case where the winning / rejection lottery result is a loss, the variation time can be different depending on the number of suspensions at the start of the variation in both the case where the determined symbol is “HA” and the case where the determined symbol is “HB”. May be. As a configuration example in such a case, (1) the difference between the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 is The configuration in which the determined symbol is “HB” is smaller than the case where the determined symbol is “HA”. (2) When the determined symbol is “HB” than in the case where the determined symbol is “HA”, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation mode (variation time) is determined with high probability (with a wide range of random numbers) without depending on it.

  Here, in the present example, regarding the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortening game state, if the winning / rejecting lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA”, the number of holdings is 0 to 1 , If the random number is “0-799”, it is group 1; if the random number is “800-1023”, it is group 2; Is "0 to 899", it belongs to Group 1, and when the random number is "900 to 1023", it belongs to Group 2. Therefore, when the random number value is “0 to 799”, the variation mode group is determined to be Group 1 and when the random number value is “900 to 1023”, the variation mode group is determined to be Group 2. Is "800 to 899", it is unknown whether the variation mode group will be Group 1 or Group 2 until the end of the suspension. In other words, when the determination symbol when the winning or losing lottery result is a loss is “HA”, a random value (or a random value range) from which the variation mode group can be uniquely determined (in this example, “0” 799 "or" 900 to 1023 "and a random number (or random number range) in which the variation mode group is hard to be uniquely determined (in this example, a random number of" 800 to 899 "). Therefore, when performing a look-ahead effect for a hold whose decision symbol is “HA” when the winning / losing lottery result is a loss, which change mode group does the change actually belong to at the time of the hold digestion? It may be necessary to determine the number of reservations in order to determine. Further, when the newly generated fluctuation mode group of the hold is a random number value (or a random number value range) that can be uniquely determined, it is preferable to perform a prefetch lottery, and such a configuration is preferable. (For example, when the random number value related to a certain hold is “900 to 1023”, the number of the remaining holds at the time of digestion of the certain hold is Even if this is the case, if it is configured to execute the reach effect in the variation mode group of the “group 2”, when the certain suspension occurs, the decision regarding the certain suspension is made. Even if the symbol is scheduled to be "HA", it is possible to execute a prefetching effect on hold. Since it is known that a reach effect will eventually occur, Only it does not occur inconsistency be executed pending read-ahead performance of).

In the present example, the fluctuation time included in each group is the fluctuation time in the same range (for example, at the time of a loss, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds or less for the group 1 regardless of whether or not the time reduction game state is set). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time shortening game state, the change time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected, In the shortened game state, the fluctuation times of 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds are selected). In such a case, instead of separating the fluctuation mode groups based on the absolute fluctuation time independent of the game state, a certain game state is set. (For example, in the non-time shortening game state, the fluctuation time of 10 to 15 seconds is changed to Group 1, and in the time shortening game state, the fluctuation mode group is changed). Time Group 1 variation of 1.5 seconds, and isolate) as may be configured. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the division of groups based on the variation time. For example, group information (for example, executing any one of a plurality of reach productions in which the character A appears, based on the execution contents of the production) Is the range information obtained by dividing the fluctuation of performing a reach production among a plurality of reach productions in which the character A appears in the group A and the group B, that is, a jackpot when the reach production is performed. The information linked with the degree of expectation) may be transmitted to the sub side.

  According to the configuration of the present example, in a certain hold that is a target for a prefetch effect, a game state may be different between a timing at which the certain hold occurs and a timing at which the certain hold is consumed (for example, the certain hold It is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect in consideration of a case where a game state shifts, such as a case where a previously consumed hold is a big hit. More specifically, with respect to a certain hold that has occurred during the probability change gaming state, when the non-probability change game state is reached at the timing at which the certain hold is consumed, the change mode group included in the change mode random number delimiter information regarding the certain hold is , All belong to a group having a high expected value (even if the game state changes, the target degree of expectation of suspension can be maintained), or the same fluctuation mode in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-probability fluctuation game state In the case of a group, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect related to the certain hold, and as a change mode group included in the change mode random number delimiter information regarding the certain hold, a group having a low expected value when referring to the non-probability changing game state (The expectation of the target hold may be reduced due to a change in the game state), or If the different fluctuation mode group and a rate change gaming state, and infeasible prefetching effect related to the certain pending, it can be an equal.

  Further, as an example in which the game state transitions and the expected variation mode group may be different from the actually executed variation mode group, there are (1) a plurality of holds in the main game hold. In this situation, a certain hold in the main game hold is exhausted to become a big hit (or a small hit), and the game state transitions after the end of the special game related to the certain hold (or after the end of the bonus game related to the small hit) ( For example, a transition from the non-probability variation gaming state to the probability variation gaming state), and the variation mode group of the hold in the main game hold remaining when the certain hold is consumed, (2) end of the special game After the end (or after the end of the small hit), the game state transitions when the main game symbol has fluctuated the predetermined number of times (for example, the time reduction game state after the end of the special game, and the main game symbol becomes 50 times after the end of the special game). Transition to a non-time shortening game state at the time of movement, etc.), and a hold that occurs before a predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol ends after the end of the special game (or after the end of the small hit), An example in which the variation mode groups may be different when the main game symbol is exhausted after the predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol has ended after the end of the special game. (3) When the game state is the probability-variable game state, It is configured to execute a lottery (so-called drop lottery) that shifts to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state for each change, and trigger suspension occurs in the probability fluctuation game state, and by winning the fall lottery before the trigger suspension is exhausted Examples in which the variation mode groups can be different are given.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the same variation mode group (for example, group 1 when the main game time reduction flag is on and group 1 when the main game time reduction flag is off) are set by turning on and off the main game time reduction flag. Even in the case of 1), the range of the random numbers included in the same variation mode group is configured to be different, and the variation mode random number separation information (for example, the second main There are a plurality of breaks 1) at the time of hitting the game variation mode determination lottery table. In addition, the variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second primary mode) that includes only the range of the random number included in both the ON and OFF states of the main game time reduction flag within the range of the random numbers of the same variation mode group There is also a break 3) at the time of hitting the game variation mode determination lottery table. Note that the number of types of the variation mode random number delimiter information in each table (for example, the four types from 1 to 4 when the first main game variation mode determination lottery table is lost) is the number of types of the variation mode group. (For example, three groups 1 to 3 at the time of loss of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table).

Further, in the present embodiment, the group 3 (group C) among the variation mode groups can be selected as the variation mode group only when the variation time is longer than a predetermined time (in this example, 60 seconds or more). It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups is selected, the variation time is relatively long. In other words, the expectation of a big hit is increased (the variation mode that can be selected). The ratio of the inner jackpot becomes higher). In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the group 3 may be configured to be easier to select (the range of random numbers is wider) in the non-time reduction game state than in the time reduction game state. During the gaming state (especially during the probability-variation gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state), by configuring so that the variation with a short variation time is easily selected, the time required for the next big hit is reduced, Stress can be reduced. In addition, in the time shortened game state, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is easily opened, the ball is easily entered into the second main game start port B10, and a situation in which there is no hold is unlikely to occur. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be easier to be selected when the group 3 is in the time reduction game state than in the non-time reduction game state. Since the reduced game state) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the non-time shortened game state, it is effective to use the effect with a high degree of expectation to increase the player's expectation. The policy regarding the grouping of the variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate. The number of groups and the number and types of variation modes (variation time) belonging to each group are not limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in this example, those belonging to the group 3 (group C) are “the ones that are expected to have a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time”, but other than “the fluctuation time that is the longest that can be selected. It may be a “scheduled one”, “an average value of fluctuation modes (variation times) belonging to the group is equal to or longer than a predetermined time”, or “a big hit is determined”. In addition, the variation mode is associated with an effect mode executed by the sub-main control unit SM (for example, a loss effect, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect 1, a super reach effect 2, a big hit confirmed super reach effect, etc.). A group may be configured to be divided (a loss effect corresponding change mode group, a normal reach effect corresponding change mode group, ..., a jackpot determined super reach effect corresponding change mode group).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the random number of the variation time and the variation mode group depends on whether the main game time reduction flag is on or off, and whether the table to be referred to is the normal variation mode determination table or the limited frequency table. The range of the random number of the variation time and / or variation mode group differs depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability variation gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, or the like. It may be configured to obtain.

  Further, in this example, in the second main game fluctuation mode determination table, in the non-probability fluctuation state and the non-time reduction game state, a specific fluctuation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol (In this example, the fluctuation time is 40 seconds). By adopting such a configuration, when a specific effect is selected, the player can recognize that the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, so whether the specific effect is executed or not is determined. For example, it is possible to give a variety of effects to the effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that this example is merely an example. For example, in the non-probability changing state and the non-time shortening game state, the reach effect can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, while the second main game is selected. When the symbol is a lost symbol, it may be configured such that only a non-reach effect can be executed. In another game state (probability fluctuation state and non-time shortening game state or limited frequency state), similarly, a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is obtained only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selectable.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode of the first main game side, if the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, the pattern is referred to in the non-time shortening game state. Table contents of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table and a limited frequency table B that is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is ON (in this example, for example, when a small hit is won). (For example, the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode group corresponding to the random number value) are the same. That is, in the present embodiment, on the first main game side, even if the fluctuation pattern table is changed, if the game is in the non-time shortening game state, the loss pattern (in this example, “HA”, HB ”may have the same table configuration (variable time, variation mode group, whether the variation mode depends on the number of holds, etc. corresponding to random numbers, etc.) so that they can be the same. It is configured. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the content of the table relating to the lost symbol may be changed (or may be the same) depending on whether or not the game is in the probability varying game state, or the second main game side A similar configuration may be provided in a variation mode.

  Further, in this example, even if the result of the lottery is a loss and the determined symbol is the same ("HA" or "HB"), a different variation mode can be selected according to the gaming state. ing. For example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, the variation time is 30 seconds in the case of the non-time shortening game state with respect to a case where the winning / losing lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HB”. While it is configured such that only the effects described above are selected, if the time reduction game state is selected, an effect whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds may be selected (specifically, the non-time reduction game state). In the case of, an effect with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the case of the time reduction game state). Furthermore, in the fluctuation mode determination table of the first main game side in which the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, if the time reduction game state is set, the non-time reduction game state is set. In comparison with the variation mode, a variation mode in which the variation time is short (5 seconds in this example) is relatively easily selected. Note that this example is an example, and the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, variation time) is selected when the determined symbols are the same even when the game state is different. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, when the determined symbol is “HA”, when the game is in the non-time shortening game state, the variation mode (variation time) may be different depending on the number of holdings. May be dependent on the number of holds. On the other hand, when the game is in the time reduction game state, the variation mode (variable time) does not differ depending on the number of holds. When the determined symbol is “HB”, the variation mode (variation time) does not differ depending on the number of holds regardless of the game state.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and that the winning / losing lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HB”, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the non-probability variation gaming state and The selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is long (variation time is 60 seconds or more in this example) may be different from the case of the time reduction game state. More specifically, the probability variation game In the state and the non-time shortening game state, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) may be increased or decreased. Good. Similarly, when the result of the lottery is losing and the determined symbol is "HA", when the game is in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and when the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state. Thus, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be different. More specifically, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state In the case of, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be increased or decreased.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning / failing lottery result is a loss, the determined symbol is “HA”, and the game is in the non-time shortening game state, the fluctuation time in the fluctuation mode on the first main game side is changed. Have groups that can differ depending on the number of holds at the start of the change. On the other hand, similarly, even if the determined symbol is “HA”, in the variation mode of the first main game side in the time reduction game state, the variation time (and the production mode) ) Can be determined. Note that this example is merely an example. For example, if the winning / losing lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA” (“HB”), the game state (whether or not a probability fluctuation state and / or Irrespective of whether or not the game is in the time-reduced game state), the fluctuation time (and the production mode) may be different depending on the number of suspensions at the start of the fluctuation. When the symbol is “HB”, it may be configured such that it can be determined in one variation time (and the effect mode) irrespective of the number of holdings at the time of holding out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may differ depending on the number of holds at the time of using up the hold related to the “HA”. According to the variation mode random number delimiter information, there is a case where the variation mode groups differ depending on the number of reservations at the time of consumption of the reservation regarding the “HA” and a case where the variation mode groups do not differ. In addition, in the case of a hold in which the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HB”, it is re-designed that the selection tendency of the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of holds at the time of consumption of the hold related to the “HB”. I will add it.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1574, in steps 1576 and 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1600). Note that also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570, or step 1574, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determining means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 sets the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game time reduction flag / auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, in step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, step 17
In 04 and step 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1702, in Step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if “Yes” in the step 1710, the process shifts to a step 1712. In the case of No at step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 stores the release pattern (for example, the stop of the main game design) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. When the symbol is 3A, 3B or 4B, an opening pattern of “open for 0.2 seconds → close for 1.0 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds → closed”, and the stop symbols of the main game symbols are 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, an “open pattern of“ open for 29.0 seconds → closed ”) is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d) to make the first big winning. The mouth C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in a special game timer MP34t (especially, an open time timer), and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, and the like) relating to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and adds a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) to the first winning port C10 (or the second winning port C20) in this round. ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1724, at Step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially, the opening time timer) and sets a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. If the answer is No in Step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1800).

Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 sets the first winning
The driving of the special winning opening electric auditorium C11d (or the second winning electric motor C21d of the second winning opening C20) is stopped to close the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). . Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the last round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). (Not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) for ending the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). It should be noted that also in the case of No at step 1734, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines that the stop symbol is a probable variable big hit symbol (the probability variation game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a big hit symbol to be shifted, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A / 5A / 7A / 9A / 3B / 5B / 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, that is, in the case where the stopped symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of execution of the special game, in this example, 4A / 4B), Move to 1756.

Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines that the stop symbol is a probable change and a time saving big hit symbol (the probability fluctuation after the execution of the special game). It is a big hit symbol that shifts to a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A / 7A / 9A / 3B / 5B / 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage probability change / time saving big hit symbol (this example) Then, it is determined whether 5A or 3B). Note that the awakening stage probability change / hour savings jackpot symbol is an awakening stage (a stay stage, which can notify a player at the end of the stage whether or not the player is in a probability varying game state) after the end of the big hit. It is a big hit symbol that shifts to. In the case of Yes at Step 1758, at Step 1760, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter AMN52 to a predetermined number of times (60 in this example). Next, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets a wake-up stage shift command (a command related to information to shift to the wake-up stage) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command sending process in step 1999), and the flow shifts to step 1778. Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 1758, the processing shifts to step 1778.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1756 (that is, if the stop symbol is any of 3A, 4A, and 4B in this example), in step 1766, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first and second main game symbols. With reference to the information temporary storage means MB11b-C, the stop symbol is a non-probable change / time saving big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state after the execution of the special game, and in this example, 4A It is determined whether or not 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the number of time savings based on the big hit symbol to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. For example, when the stop symbol 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, 20 times in the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1 and 4A-2 or 4B-2 Is 60 times, etc.) Thus, in this example, among the big hit symbols belonging to the 4A symbol (4B symbol), 4A-1 (4B-1) having the number of time reductions of 20 and 4A-2 (4B-2) having the number of time reductions of 60 are included. 4B-2) is included, but the type of the big hit symbol and the type of the number of time savings are not limited thereto, and other types of the number of time savings (for example, the number of time savings is 40) 4A- 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and the number of time savings in each of the illustrated big hit symbols and the 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2) in the 4A symbol (4B symbol) are exemplified. Can be changed as appropriate. Next, at step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c to the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the number of time savings set in the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1774, the specific game control means MP50 sets the awake stage shift command and the command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command to the sub main control unit SM (step It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of 1999), and the flow shifts to step 1778. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1766 {that is, when the stop symbol is the latent probability variable big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specific game control means MP50 reads the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether at least one of the main game probable change flag and the main game time reduction flag is ON at the time of the jackpot winning. If Yes in step 1776, the process moves to step 1778.

  Next, in step 1778 and step 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step 1800).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1776 {that is, if the main game probability change flag and the main game time reduction flag are off (normal game state)}, in step 1782, the specific game control means MP50 issues the devil stage shift command (the devil stage shift command). Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). In addition, after the special game related to the "3A" symbol won in the normal game state, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and after the small hit game won in the normal game state, the normal game state is set. It is configured to perform almost the same effect in any case. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) related to the “3A” symbol or the small hit symbol has been executed (creating a so-called hidden state), and the interest of the game is increased. It will be improved.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1802, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hitting flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns off the small hitting flag in the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1806, the small hitting game control means MP40 stores the opening pattern (in this example, the first big prize similar to that at the time of executing the special game relating to the latent probability changing big hit symbol) in the small hitting game related information temporary storing means MP40b. The opening / closing pattern of the mouth C10 is set, for example, (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 1.0 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds → close). Next, in step 1808, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns on the small hitting execution flag in the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the first big winning port C10 and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 sends a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the production mode during the small hit game is a special (The same command as in the case of the latent probability change big hit symbol is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM because it is the same as the effect mode in the game) In the control command transmission process of 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, when a small hit or a latent change probability big hit is won in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state (normal game state), the first big winning opening C10 during the small hit game is opened. The mode and the production mode are the same as during the special game according to the latent probability changing big hit symbol, and the stay stage executed after the small hitting game and after the special game relating to the latent probability changing big hit symbol is also the same, It is difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (or the small hit game) related to the big hit symbol of the hit symbol or the latent change big hit symbol is executed (creating a so-called latent state), thereby improving the interest of the game. It will be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1802, at Step 1811, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hitting execution flag is on. I do. If Yes in step 1811, the process moves to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s and determines whether or not there is a winning (ball entry) in the first big winning opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b and places a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10. Is determined. If Yes in step 1814, the process moves to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game timer MP41t and determines a predetermined time (for example, 0 Open for 2 seconds → close for 1.0 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds → 1.4 seconds related to closing). If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1818.

Next, in step 1818, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops driving the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d and closes the first big winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1823, the small hitting game control means MP40 sends a special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub side, in this example, the effect mode during the small hitting game is a special (The same command as that in the case of the latent probability change big hit symbol because it is the same as the effect mode during the game) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (step In the control command transmission process of 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to step 1824.

Next, in step 1824, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether the main game probability change flag and the main game time reduction flag are off (normal game state). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1828, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the stopped main game symbol is a small number of small hitting symbols ｛1K in this example, It is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in which the limited frequency table is referred to after the small hit game has ended is smaller than that of the long hit small hit symbol (2K). In the case of Yes in step 1828, in step 1830, the small hitting game control means MP40 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a short number (
10), and the flow shifts to step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1828, in Step 1832, the small hitting game control means MP40 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a long number (30 times), and proceeds to Step 1834. Next, step 1
In 834, the small hitting game control means MP40 sends a command for transmitting the devil stage shift command and the command (command to the sub side) related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the trust buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (1997 process in step). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1811, step 1816 or step 1824, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In the present embodiment, the special winning opening to be opened during the execution of the small hit game is the first special winning opening C10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In such a configuration, the large winning opening C20 which is opened during the execution of the special game relating to the latent probability changing big hit symbol (in this example, 3A) may be the second large winning opening C20. It is preferred to do so.

Next, a control process executed on the sub main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process in FIG. 4D is a process on the sub main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or the like. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When receiving → initialize the sub-side RAM, when receiving various information commands → reset the performance-related information at the time of power interruption in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM determines from the information related to the hold temporarily stored in the schematic holding information temporary storage means SM22b that a trigger hold (a hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery). The information is deleted (if the hold having the information indicating that the trigger is held does not exist in the hold, the process proceeds to the next process without executing this process), and all the hold display modes are set to “white”. Display (reset the processing related to the pre-reading effect). The processing at the time of power interruption is not limited to this, and even after the power interruption is restored, the prefetch effect can be continued without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is on hold and the information on the hold display mode. May be. In the case of such a configuration, for example, an evacuation area capable of maintaining information even during a power interruption is provided on the sub side, and when a power interruption occurs, information relating to the effect is backed up in the evacuation area, and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the information that has been backed up at times. Further, when the power is restored, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation stop, or when a hold occurs (with respect to a hold other than the newly generated hold), information on the contents of the hold may be received again from the main side. Although not particularly shown in this example, at the time of power-off recovery, the main side is configured to transmit only information relating to the number of suspensions (information relating to the details of suspension is not transmitted). . Therefore, since the information on the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power failure is restored, the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold (note that the main side holds the information at the time of the power failure recovery. , And may be configured to execute a prefetching effect on the suspension). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative pattern, if there is no function to maintain the information at the time of the power failure, there will be no darkness until a change end command is received from the main side. A screen (for example, a screen displaying “under preparation”) will be displayed. After that, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 13B, first, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the later-described hold information management process. Execute Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and executes The repetition processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM sends a command input port ( Check the input port of the data signal line described above). In step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b) based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process executed immediately before this interrupt process.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the circuit diagram hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and issues a command (first first game pattern or second main game symbol) related to the occurrence of a new hold from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not (hold information related to the game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 sets a schematic storage counter in the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, "1" is added to the maximum number of the second main game (4). Next, in step 2106, the wiring diagram holding information display control means SM22 temporarily stores the new holding success / failure result and the command relating to the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side in the wiring holding information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the wiring diagram suspension information display control means SM22 converts the suspension information (particularly, the fluctuation mode group, the fluctuation mode random number separation information, etc.) based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Is temporarily stored in the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. If the main side does not transmit the information on the success / failure result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information, the information is stored in the suspension information temporary storage area in step 2106 or 2108. Will not be stored temporarily. Next, in step 2110, the layout reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new reservation is a reservation of the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning prize determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, if No in step 2110, in step 2200, the placement plan information display control unit SM22 performs a second main game winning prize determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, in step 2112, the placement suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the placement suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new suspension has information indicating that the new suspension is a trigger suspension. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2112, in step 2250, the layout pending information display control means SM22 performs a prefetch pending content determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2114. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2112, the process shifts to step 2114.

  Next, in step 2114, the wiring diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the suspension display mode of the suspension other than the trigger suspension (all suspensions when there is no trigger suspension in the suspension) to “white”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold display mode of the hold in which the hold display mode is not changed by the hold change effect or the hold before the change is configured to be “white”. Next, in step 2116, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether the suspension change effect of the suspension other than the trigger suspension (all suspensions when there is no trigger suspension in the suspension) (when the suspension display mode is changed) Is determined to be “none”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold change effect relating to the hold in which the hold display manner does not change due to the hold change effect is “none” (the hold change effect is not executed, and the hold display manner remains “white”). ). Next, in step 3050, the placement suspension information display control means SM22 executes a later-described occurrence suspension content transmission process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2118, the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and has received a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 2118, at step 2120, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the schematic storage counter in the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122, the design hold information display control means SM22 stores the hold information (particularly the pass / fail result, the stop symbol information, the change mode group, and the change mode random number delimiter information) related to the symbol change in the design hold information. The information is deleted from the temporary storage means SM22b and the remaining hold information is shifted. Next, in step 2124, the design suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 3100. Next, in step 3100, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 executes a digestion suspension content transmission process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2118, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 24. The present process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former look-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2152, the hold look-ahead effect production execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the circuit diagram hold information temporary storage means SM22b and places the second main game hold (the first main game hold) in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested with priority over the gaming side). In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the pending prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b,
It is determined whether or not there is a hold having information that the trigger is held in the hold. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the winning prefetch lottery (first main game winning prefetch lottery, the second main game winning prefetch lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether there is a hold that is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2160, the process moves to step 2162.

  Next, in the latter process related to the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2162, the reservation prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new reservation becomes a big hit. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prize winning prefetch lottery in which the new hold is won at a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), Move on to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether the stop symbol related to the new suspension is “HA”. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2166, in step 2168, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending change mode group is group 3. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the prefetching lottery, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetching lottery in consideration of the variation mode group. In addition, when determining whether or not to perform the prefetch lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the prefetch lottery in consideration of the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prize winning lottery to win with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/10) for the new hold, Move on to step 2174. On the other hand, if No in step 2166 (that is, if the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HB”), in step 2172, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination unit SM26k determines that the new hold The winning pre-fetch lottery at the time of winning with a probability (1/3 in this example) is executed, and the routine goes to Step 2174. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that when the stop symbol related to the first main game is “HB”, it is easier to win the prefetch lottery than when it is “HB”.

  Next, in step 2174, the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets “trigger hold” to the new hold in the schematic-drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, which has won the winning-time prefetch lottery. The information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

On the other hand, if No in step 2152 (if the second main game hold exists in the hold), in step 2178, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k temporarily stores the information in the circuit diagram hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating “trigger hold” from the stored information related to the hold (if the hold having the information indicating the trigger hold does not exist in the hold, the processing is not executed and the next To the next process (the process of step 2112). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2154, step 2158, step 2160, or step 2174, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2112). It should be noted that the processing of step 2178 is performed in the case where the second main game-side hold exists (occurs) in the gaming machine of the second main game-side priority digestion as in the present embodiment. This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the reserved order of the game side is exhausted first, so that the order of change does not become the planned change order, and the prefetching effect over a plurality of changes is not normally executed. Further, as a prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery, a condition of whether or not a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a hold of a specific variation mode random number delimiter information) does not exist in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition. Is also good. In addition, in this example, when executing the look-ahead effect on the first main game side, there is no hold on the second main game side, and the non-time shortening game state (opening time extension function is inactive). And in the non-time shortened game state (during the opening time extension function operation), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the second main game prize-time prefetching determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 24. The present process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and the process related to the prefetch lottery. In the former look-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2202, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the current game state is the time shortened game state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether there is a hold that is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2206, the process moves to step 2208.

  Next, in the latter process related to the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2208, the reservation prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new reservation becomes a big hit. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination unit SM26k executes a prize-winning lottery to win with a predetermined probability (１ ／ in this example) for the new hold. Move to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2208, in step 2212, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the circuit diagram suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the new pending change mode group is group C. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prize-winning lottery for winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new hold. Move to step 2220. On the other hand, if No in step 2212, the process moves to step 2220.

Next, in step 2220, the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets “trigger hold” to the new hold in the schematic-drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, which has been won in the winning-time prefetch lottery. The information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). Note that also in the case of No in step 2202, step 2204, step 2206, or step 2220, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2112). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time reduction game state, the second main game side is configured to be able to win the prefetch lottery, while the first main game side is not configured to win the prefetch lottery. In the shortened game state, the first main game side is configured to be able to win the prefetch lottery, while the second main game side is not configured to win the prefetch lottery. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a state where the opening time of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (a state in which the opening time extension function is activated), the second main game is started. A state in which the first main game side does not win the prefetching lottery while the first main game side does not win the prefetching lottery, and the opening time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is not relatively extended (opening time extension function). (In a state in which is not operated), it may be possible to win the prefetch lottery on the first main game side, but not to win the prefetch lottery on the second main game side. Also, in the following description, in the case of exemplifying a configuration in which the operation is different between the time reduction gaming state and the non-time reduction gaming state, the opening time extension function is activated and the opening time extension function is activated. There is no problem even if it is replaced with a configuration that operates differently when it is not present. In this example, as described above, when executing the look-ahead effect on the first main game side, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function (Operation), and in the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function not activated), the game is configured to proceed mainly on the first main game side. Further, when executing the look-ahead effect on the second main game side, it is a condition that the time reduction game state (opening time extension function is in operation) and the time reduction game state (opening time extension function) (During operation), the game mainly proceeds on the second main game side. With such a configuration, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the time reduction game state (opening time extension function is operating) with the look-ahead effect in the non-time reduction game state (open time extension function is operating), The pre-reading effect (or a matter related to pre-reading such as pre-fetching lottery) on the second main game side in the shortened game state (during operation of the open time extension function) and the first main game in the non-time shortened game state (operation of the open time extension function) It may be compared with a pre-reading effect (or a pre-reading-related item such as a pre-selection lottery) on the side.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the trigger suspension display mode with reference to the suspension display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit). Next, in step 2256, the diagrammatic suspension information display control means SM22 converts the trigger change hold change effect (the effect executed when the trigger hold hold display mode changes from “white”) into the hold change effect determination table. (At the time of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2262.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2252, in step 2258, the display mode of trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). Next, in step 2260, the schematic diagram holding information display control means SM22 converts the hold change effect of the trigger hold (the effect performed when the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white”) into the hold change effect determination table. (At the time of loss), and the process proceeds to step 2262. Next, in step 2262, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines a suspension change effect execution variation (a design variation in which the suspension change effect is to be executed), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114). Transition. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold change effect execution change in which the hold change effect related to the trigger hold is executed is a symbol change related to any of the holds currently occurring. It is configured as follows.

Here, of the four tables at the bottom of the figure, the two upper tables are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the present embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold that can be changed during execution of the hold change effect is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit) is “rainbow”. , “Red”, “green”, and “blue”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss) are “red”, “green”. , And "blue", and the lottery is performed by using a random number exclusive for determining the hold display mode. When referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), "red" is most easily selected, while when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), "blue" is most easily selected. The jackpot expectation rate (the ratio of the rate of occurrence of the jackpot fluctuation to the total occurrence rate of the jackpot fluctuation and the loss fluctuation) for each hold display mode when the hold change effect occurs is “rainbow”. "Color" is selected only at the time of the big hit, and colors other than "rainbow" are in the order of "red", "green", and "blue" from the one with the highest expectation of the big hit. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type that can be changed or the color that can be changed is changed, for example, when the open extension function is not activated than when the open extension function is activated. The number of types of the hold display mode may be larger in the non-probability changing game state and in the non-time shortening game state than in the probability changing game state and the time shortening game state. Further, this configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the selection ratio of the hold display mode is changed. For example, in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of the big hit), “red: blue” = “300: 324” In the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), “blue” is easier to select than “red” regardless of the success / failure result, such as “red: blue” = “100: 624”. The difference between the selectivity of the suspended display mode and the difference of the selectivity of the suspended display mode at the time of the loss may be configured such that the difference at the time of the loss is larger. Further, in this example, the display color of the hold is configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the symbol change related to the trigger hold is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit (or It may be configured so as to be able to indicate the game state after the execution of the special game together with the degree of expectation of the big hit). In the case of such a configuration, in particular, during the probability fluctuation game state, the display color of the hold indicates the degree of expectation to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the hold. (For example, if the reserved display color is “red”, the probability of change is high, if the color is “blue”, the probability of change is small, etc.). It is possible to execute an effective production that incites whether to end.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation may be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of types of hold display modes. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of holding change effects can be executed during execution of the prefetching effect (from the timing of winning the prefetching lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to trigger holding). With this configuration, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, if the display mode of the hold changed in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold changed in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, each time the hold change effect is executed, the display mode changes to the hold display mode with high expectation of big hit. It is desirable to be configured to (rank up) (so as not to impair the player's expectation). Also, the effect related to the change of the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the change of the hold display may be provided. For example, when the change starts (or at the time of the hold digestion), the hold shakes. An effect mode in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is (a so-called gasp pattern), and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter may be provided.

  Next, of the four tables at the bottom of the figure, the lower two tables are a hold change effect determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold change effect determination table (at the time of loss). In the present embodiment, when the effect form of the hold change effect is determined with reference to the hold change effect determination table (at the time of the big hit) or the hold change effect determination table (at the time of loss), the type of the effect form that can be selected is “ There are four types of cut-in hold change, "weak dialogue change," "medium dialogue hold change," and "strong dialogue hold change." Note that the jackpot expectation degree relating to the hold corresponding to the hold change effect when the hold change effect occurs (the ratio of the occurrence rate of the change that becomes the big hit to the total occurrence rate of the change that becomes the big hit and the change that causes the loss) Is configured to be able to differ depending on the pending change effect that occurs, from the hold change effect with high jackpot expectation to “cut-in pending change”, “strong dialogue pending change”, “medium dialogue pending change”, “weak dialogue pending” Change ”. It should be noted that the effect of the held change effect that can be executed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or decreased or the changeable color is changed. Further, in the present example, the design variation related to the trigger hold can be configured to indicate the degree of expectation at which the symbol change according to the hold change effect becomes a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Or, it may be configured to be able to indicate the game state after the execution of the special game, together with the degree of expectation to be a big hit. In addition, in the figure, it is configured that the big change expectation degree of the hold corresponding to the hold change effect can be different due to the difference of the hold change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold change effect is different. Thereby, it may be configured that the hold change expectation degree of the hold corresponding to the hold change effect can be different (for example, when the “cut-in hold change effect” occurs, the hold display mode has a probability of 100%) Changes, and when the “weak dialogue change effect” occurs, the hold display mode changes with a probability of 20%).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the occurrence suspension content transmission processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 in FIG. First, in step 3052, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the first and second pieces of the hold display mode in the digestion order among the holds on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). That is). Next, in step 3054, the diagrammatic hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the third or fourth digestion order among the holds on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3056, the diagrammatic hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the first or second digestion order among the holds on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3058, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode in the digestion order of the third to fourth digests among the holds on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command relating to the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS is set in four times, and the order of “first to second digestion of the first main game hold → first order” 3rd to 4th digestion order of 1 main game hold → 1st to 2nd digestion order of second main game hold → 3rd to 4th digestion order of second main game hold ” It is configured. The order of setting the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS may be changed without any problem. For example, “the first to second digestion order of the second main game hold → the third main game hold 3” The fourth digestion order → first and second digestion order of the first main game reservation → the third and fourth digestion order of the first main game reservation ”may be adopted. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine in which the hold of the second main game side is prioritized over the hold of the first main game side, the command related to the hold display mode of the hold that is preferentially consumed is transmitted. It can be configured to set in advance. It should be noted that the information related to the hold display mode also includes information related to the hold display position. With such a configuration, the hold position is exhausted, and the display position is changed even if the hold is the same. In this case, it is possible to appropriately display the suspension. Also, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting a command related to the hold display mode of the third digestion order hold on the first main game side, only one hold on the first main game side is performed) In the case where it does not occur, etc.), the information related to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, information indicating that the hold does not apply (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) may be transmitted to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3060, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets the first main game suspension number and the second main game suspension number (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and 2250, a hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the digestion suspension content transmission processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets the suspension change effect of the suspension of the first main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS) (step 2250 and step The pending change effect determined in 2116 is set). Next, in step 3104, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the first and second pieces of the hold display mode in the digestion order among the holds on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3106, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the third or fourth digestion order among the holds on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3108, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the hold change effect of the hold on the second main game side (a command will be transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS) (step 2250 and The pending change effect determined in step 2116 is set). Next, in step 3110, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the first and second pieces of the hold display mode in the digestion order among the holds on the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be). Next, in step 3112, the schematic diagram holding information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of the third to fourth digestion order among the holdings on the second main game side (the state being transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Becomes). As described above, in the present embodiment, the display / display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS is set to be divided into four times, and the order of “first to second digestion of the first main game hold → first main game” It is configured to be set in the order of the 3rd to 4th digestion order of the reservation → the 1st to 2nd digestion order of the second main game reservation → the 3rd to 4th digestion order of the second main game reservation ” I have. Note that the order in which the commands related to the hold display mode to be transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS are set may be changed in the same manner as in the above-described occurrence hold content transmission processing, and for example, the second main game hold 1st to 2nd digestion order → 3rd to 4th digestion order of second main game hold → 1st main game hold 1st to 2nd digestion order → 3rd to 4th main game hold order Eye digestion order ". With such a configuration, in a gaming machine in which the hold of the second main game side is prioritized over the hold of the first main game side, the command related to the hold display mode of the hold that is preferentially consumed is transmitted. It can be configured to set in advance. It should be noted that the information related to the hold display mode also includes information related to the hold display position. With such a configuration, the hold position is exhausted, and the display position is changed even if the hold is the same. In this case, it is possible to appropriately display the suspension. Also, when there is no corresponding hold (for example, when setting the hold display mode of the hold in the third digestion order related to the first main game side, only one hold of the first main game side occurs. In the case where there is no such information, the information related to the hold display mode is not transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when there is no corresponding hold, information indicating that the hold does not apply (information indicating that there is no hold display mode) may be transmitted to the sub-sub side.

  Next, in step 3114, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets the first main game suspension number and the second main game suspension number (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and 2250, a hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). In this way, in the digestion hold content transmission process that is executed when the hold is exhausted, in addition to the occurrence hold content transmission process that is executed when the hold occurs, a command related to the hold change effect is set. The processing is executed (the processing for setting the hold change effect is not executed when the hold occurs).

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the consumption of the hold, a command related to the hold change effect of the hold of the first main game side and a command related to the hold change effect of the hold of the second main game side are set. Also, among the set commands, there are also commands indicating no action (used when a command transmission error occurs or when the second main game side suspends interruption). In addition, it is also configured to set a command related to the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number, and the command is set when a hold occurs and when a hold is completed. The hold display mode of the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side is also set at the time of occurrence of the hold and at the time of the digestion. A command corresponding to the later hold display position is set (also in the command, a command indicating no action exists as described above).

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the schematic display content determining means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) transmit the symbol information temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the variation of the decoration, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is the big hit symbol In the case of a zigzag pattern such as "7 / 7.7" or a losing pattern, a variation pattern "1 / 3.5" or the like and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode of the main game In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined, and the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, transmits the information relating to the stop symbols and variable aspects of decorative symbols and the determined stores temporarily reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) the sub-sub-control unit SS. Next, in step 3150, the wiring diagram display content determining means SM21n executes the change suggestion display mode management process described later. Next, in step 2308, the design display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Note that also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400). As described above, the present embodiment is configured to transmit the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol to the sub-sub-control unit SS at the time of holding the digestion. At the timing after execution of the transmission process, information on the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the variation mode is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the design hold information display control means SM22 refers to the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the design change is a design change related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the design hold information display control means SM22 refers to the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the symbol change is a symbol change related to the first main game side. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the diagrammatic suspension information display control means SM22 determines the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side and sets it (when the command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Become). Next, in step 3158, the display suspension information display control means SM22 determines the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side to be “none” (meaning that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). (The command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3154, in step 3160, the display suspension information display control means SM22 sets the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side to "none" (that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). (Which means that a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Next, in step 3162, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines and sets the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3164, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side to "none" (that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). (The command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Next, in step 3166, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side to be “none” (meaning that the change suggestion display mode is not displayed). (The command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of the big hit) and the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss). In the present embodiment, the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold is determined with reference to the change suggestion display determination table. The types of the change suggestion display modes that can be selected when the determination is made with reference to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of the big hit) are “rainbow”, “red”, “green”, “yellow”, and “blue”. , “Gray”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when making a determination with reference to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss) are “red”, “green”, “yellow”, and “gray”. The number of types of the change suggestion display mode is larger than the number of types of the hold display mode at both the time of the big hit and the time of the loss. In the present embodiment, the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of the big hit) is determined rather than the type of display mode that can be selected when the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss) is determined. In this case, the type of the change suggestion display mode that can be selected is configured to be greater, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is selected when the determination is made with reference to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of the big hit). The type of display mode that can be selected when determining with reference to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss) may be configured to be more than the type of the change suggestion display mode to be obtained (the number of types is changed). May be the same). Further, the change suggestion display mode is randomly selected by using a random number dedicated to determining the change suggestion display mode. When referring to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of the big hit), "red" is most easily selected, while when referring to the change suggestion display determination table (at the time of loss), "gray" is most easily selected. When the change suggestion display is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree of the symbol change related to the change suggestion display (the appearance rate of the change that becomes the big hit with respect to the total appearance rate of the change that becomes the big hit and the change that becomes the loss) Ratio) is selected only when “rainbow color” is a big hit, and in colors other than “rainbow color”, “red”, “green”, “yellow”, “blue”, “blue” Gray ”. Note that the change suggestion display mode that can be displayed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type is increased or decreased or the displayable color is changed. In addition, in this example, the display color of the change suggestion display is configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the symbol change related to the trigger hold will be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. (Or in combination with the degree of expectation to be a big hit), the game state after the execution of the special game may be indicated. In the case of such a configuration, in particular, during the probability fluctuation game state, when the symbol change during the change indicates a big hit due to the display color of the change suggestion display, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the execution of the special game. (For example, if the change suggestion display mode is “red”, the probability of change is large, and if the display is gray, the probability of change is small, etc.), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute an effective effect that inspires whether the probability fluctuation game state continues or ends.

In the present embodiment, the change suggestion display is executed on the sub-sub side according to the change suggestion display mode set in the process of FIG. 7, and the symbol change is the change related to the first main game side. In this case, when the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side is displayed and the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side is not displayed, the symbol change is a change relating to the second main game side. , The change suggestion display mode of the second main game side is displayed, and the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side is not displayed. If the change suggestion display mode is “none”, the display is displayed in “white”. Note that the command set related to the change suggestion display mode in the process of FIG. 11 may be executed simultaneously with the command set related to the hold display mode in step 3050 and step 3100 (the change suggestion change set is added to the set of the hold display mode). A set of display modes may be included). Further, in the present embodiment, the transmission order of the commands transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit relating to the hold display and the change suggestion display is “hold change effect on the first main game side → 1 to 2 on the first main game side”. Hold display mode of hold of the digestion order of the item → hold display mode of hold of the 3rd to 4th digest order of the first main game side → hold change effect of the second main game side → 1 of the second main game side -Hold display mode of the second digest order hold-> Display mode of the third and fourth hold of the digest order on the second main game side-Number of hold on the first main game side and the second main game side The order is as follows: hold display based on the hold display mode → decorative symbol change mode → the first main game side change suggestion display mode → second main game side change suggestion display mode. In addition, as a configuration relating to the hold display (hold display mode corresponding to an unscheduled hold), for example, in the non-time shortening game state (when the opening time extension function is not activated), the hold display of the first main game side and the second display Both the hold display of the second main game side and the hold display of the second main game side are displayed on the effect display device SG, while the hold display of the second main game side is displayed but the first display in the time reduction game state (when the open time extension function is activated). The hold display on the main game side may be hidden.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the decoration variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the schematic change time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the decorative symbol change control timing based on the decoration variable time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not it has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , To step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2414, at step 2418, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decoration based on the decoration variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). To be sent to).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2418, at step 2422, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25), the diagram change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect) Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. If Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and the flow shifts to step 2426. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2422, the processing shifts to step 2426.

Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and sets an awakening stage flag (a flag that is turned on during staying in the awakening stage described later). Is turned on in step 2614). In the case of Yes at Step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c by 1 at Step 2430, and proceeds to Step 2432. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2428, the process shifts to step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and refers to the devil stage flag (a flag that is turned on during the devil stage stay described later; step 2634). Is turned on) is turned on. If Yes in step 2432, in step 2434, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 by 1 (decrement), and step 243.
Move to 6. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2432, the processing shifts to step 2436.

  Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (fixed display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). . Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500). I do. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2504, in steps 2506 and 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and displays the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (display is appropriately performed based on the type of big hit), and the flow shifts to step 2512. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability and big hits). It may be appropriately executed as needed based on the type or the like).

Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the hit during the execution and the stopped big hit symbol. It is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999. An effect that cannot be recognized by the person may be performed). Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of the big hit). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2600). . Note that also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2516, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a wake-up stage shift command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "wake-up stage" as the staying stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the awake stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. When the process of step 2612 is executed, it is added that the game state on the main side is the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state.

  Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2602, the processing shifts to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awakening stage stay counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. Note that the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by one for each one change (every time the main game symbol is stopped). If Yes in step 2616, the process moves to step 2618. On the other hand, if No in step 2616, in step 2619 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2619, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c to zero in step 2620, and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2999). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2619, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

On the other hand, if No in step 2604, in step 2621 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether the devil stage flag is off. If Yes in step 2621, in step 2622 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a devil stage shift command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "demon stage" as the stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage game state notification value determination table and determines the devil stage game state notification value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a devil stage game state notification value determination table. As shown in the figure, the devil stage gaming state notification value is configured so that two types of values, 10 and 30, can be selected, and 30 is easier to select than 10 (the gaming state is different). In the case of the probability varying game state, a large value is easily selected.) Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined devil stage game state notification value to the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and step 2634.
Move to When the process of step 2630 is executed, it is supplemented that the main gaming state is the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

Next, in step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the devil stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2621, the processing shifts to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In addition, the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 changes every one (every stop of the main game symbol).
Is decremented by one. If Yes in step 2636, the process moves to step 2638. On the other hand, if No in step 2636, in step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game has been won. If Yes in step 2639, in step 2640 the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 to zero, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the devil stage flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2999). It should be noted that also in the case of No at step 2639, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 2622, at Step 2641, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the current gaming state is the probability varying gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a “probable change stage” (a stay stage that can stay in the probability fluctuation game state) as a stay stage, and performs the next process (step (2999). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2641, in step 2644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “non-probable change stage” (a stay stage that can stay in the non-probability changing game state) as the stay stage, and (Step 2999).

  With the above-described configuration, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the hold display and the change suggestion display as the displays on the effect display device SG, and the sub-subs related to the hold display and the change suggestion display. By displaying commands on the control unit SS side in an appropriate transmission order and transmission mode, a hold display corresponding to a game state and a pre-reading effect being executed and a change suggestion display on the effect display device are displayed. Is possible.

Note that, in the present embodiment, when a prefetch effect is being executed, a new trigger hold is configured not to occur, so that a command related to the hold prefetch effect is not transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS. (It is assumed that the prefetch effect is being executed even during the execution of the symbol change related to the trigger hold). The present invention is not limited to this. When the pre-reading effect is being executed, a command related to the pending pre-reading effect is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS, but the command received by the sub-sub-control unit SS is ignored (the received (The processing based on the command is not executed). In addition, the configuration in which the command related to the pending pre-reading effect is not transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS, or the command related to the pending pre-reading effect is transmitted but ignored by the sub-sub-control unit SS is limited only during the execution of the pre-reading effect. However, for example, when the game state is expected to shift by the end of all the symbol changes related to the existing hold, or when a specific hold that is not a trigger hold (a hold in which a reach change is executed, a predetermined time) The above configuration may be applied even when there is the above-mentioned fluctuation time. Further, when the sub-sub-control unit SS receives the command related to the hold change effect and the hold display mode, the information is held, and the command related to the number of hold and the hold display (step 3060 and step 3114). (A command to be set) is received, and the held information is processed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of loss symbols related to the first main game are provided, and one loss symbol (in this example, “HA”) is determined in the non-time shortening game state. Is configured so that the variation mode may be different depending on the number of suspensions at the time of the variation related to the lost symbol, and that the variation time is relatively short, and the other lost symbol (in this example, “HB”) Is determined, the variation mode does not differ depending on the number of suspensions at the time of the variation related to the losing symbol, and the variation time is configured to be relatively long. And the variation mode random number delimiter information are transmitted to the sub side, so that the selected tendency of the variation mode can be made different depending on the determined losing symbol, and the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter can be selected. By the information, it will be able to determine whether to execute prefetching lottery, so that it is reduced data capacity.

  In the present embodiment, as the prohibition conditions for the prefetch lottery (prize lottery at the time of winning), there is a second main game hold in the hold, a time-reduced game state, and a hold with a big hit in the hold. (Excluding newly generated holds), the presence of a hold having information indicating that it is a trigger hold is included in the holds, and the like. However, the prohibition conditions for the prefetch lottery are not limited to these. The prohibition condition may be a probability-variable gaming state, a predetermined background effect is being executed, the number of main game reservations is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a predetermined reach effect is scheduled to be executed, and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery timing of the prefetch lottery is set to the timing of winning the game ball to the main game starting port (first main game starting port A10), but the present invention is not limited to this. Fluctuation stop timing (decoration design fluctuation stop timing), main game design change predetermined timing (decoration design change predetermined timing), main game design change start timing (decoration design change start timing), And so on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B) is completed, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency, and the big hits (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) It is configured not to shift to the limited frequency after the end.

(2nd Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, one type of effect in which the display mode of the hold changes is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various pre-reading effects and effects related to the hold may be executed. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

In the second embodiment, if a suspension is present at the start timing of fluctuation, 1 is added to the counter value, and if there is no suspension at the timing when the fluctuation ends, the counter value is reset ( A hold continuation counter SM22c, which is a counter to be cleared to zero, and an expectation degree display scenario for displaying the degree of expectation to be a big hit in a hold split preparation display mode (a hold display mode relating to a prefetch effect, which will be described later in detail). And a hold split scenario determination table SM22ta. Note that the counter value addition timing of the continuation-with-holding counter SM22c is not limited to the fluctuation start timing, and when a suspension exists at any timing in one fluctuation, 1 is added to the counter value. That is, it is only necessary that the counter value is configured to be the number of times the variable display is continued while avoiding a situation where the hold is 0 during the fluctuation stop state.

  First, FIG. 35 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2003-1 (second) and step 2050 (second), that is, the initial processing is performed based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) in step 2002. Is executed, in step 2003-1 (second), the sub-main control unit SM determines, based on the information on the hold temporarily stored in the wiring diagram holding information temporary storage means SM22b, the trigger hold (in the case of the winning prefetch lottery, The information to the effect that this is a hold is deleted (if there is no hold in the hold with information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold, this process is not executed), and the hold display mode (the hold of the change related to the change) is deleted. (Including display) are displayed in "white", and the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is cleared to zero (reset the processing related to the prefetch effect).

  After that, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the processing of FIG. 13B, first, in step 2050 (second), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM is described later. The pending simultaneous change management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the pending simultaneous change management process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (second) in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2052, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and sets the special display mode (described later, the simultaneous change It is determined whether or not there is a hold display mode to be displayed in the effect. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the devil stage flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, when the devil stage flag is on, that is, in the non-time shortened gaming state and the limited frequency state, the simultaneous holding change effect and holding with continuation counter SM22c to be described later are executed. The configuration is such that the addition of the counter value is not executed (even in the same game state, the execution availability of the simultaneous hold change effect can be different). Incidentally, in the second embodiment, when there is a hold whose hold display mode is the special hold display mode, the counter value of the hold continued counter SM22c is configured not to increase. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with a hold can be increased even when a hold which is a special hold display mode exists.

In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol change start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in Step 2058, in Step 2060, the wiring diagram reservation information display control means SM22 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the reservation continuation counter SM22c. It should be noted that the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is configured to be cleared to zero when the number of holds on the first main game side becomes 0 (when the hold is interrupted) when the fluctuation of the main game symbol is stopped. Next, in step 2062, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the suspension continuation counter SM22c, and determines that the counter value is the simultaneous holding change effect execution value (the counter value for executing the simultaneous holding change effect, In this example, it is determined whether or not 25). Here, the simultaneous change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of all the reservations to the special display mode (details will be described later).

  Next, in step 2066, the schematic diagram hold information display control means SM22 sets the hold display mode of all the holds (the display mode of the hold image display corresponding to the hold on the main game side) and the change suggestion display mode {in this paragraph. As will be described later, instead of displaying a hold image corresponding to the hold on the main game side, the main game side notifies that the game is being held on hold (a symbol change related to the held hold is being executed). The display mode 係 る related to the image display is changed to the special display mode. Next, in step 2068, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the simultaneous suspension change effect execution change flag in the flag area of the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2070. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 2058 or Step 2062, the processing shifts to Step 2070. Next, in step 2070, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the counter value of the suspension continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub-control unit (Transmitted to the SS side), and then proceeds to step 2072. Here, in the second embodiment, when the change is executed after the hold is exhausted, the change suggestion is displayed on the effect display device SG in the same or similar display mode as the hold display mode related to the hold. The display mode (the change suggestion display image) is configured to be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 2052, Step 2054 or Step 2056, at Step 2078, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 issues a command for hiding the counter value of the suspension continuation counter SM22c on the effect display device SG. It is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the flow shifts to step 2072. In the second embodiment, when the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is not displayed in step 2078, the counter value is not added. The counter value is configured to be reset. For example, the normal game state (non-probability fluctuation game state and non-time shortening game state), the devil stage flag is off, and the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is a predetermined value. From the state (for example, 15), the devil stage is turned on (transition to the devil stage), and when returning to the normal game state and the state where the devil stage flag is off again, the devil stage flag is on. If the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c does not become 0 in the state, the with-hold continuation counter SM Display counter value and the counter value of 2c is predetermined value is a counter value at the time of transition to the devil stage (e.g., 15) so that the return at. The devil stage is a stay stage that shifts after the end of the small hit game or after the end of the special game related to the latent probability changing big hit symbol (3A in this example). In addition, the configuration related to the display of the counter value is not limited to the devil stage, and may be applied to the transition of the stay stage in which the gaming state does not transition (for example, the normal gaming state before and after the stage transition). .

  Next, in step 2072, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b to determine whether or not the simultaneous change change effect execution change flag is ON. . In the case of Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation end timing of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2074, in step 2076, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns off the simultaneous suspension change effect execution changing flag in the flag area of the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the following processing. Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 2100). Note that also in the case of No in step 2072 or step 2074, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2100). Note that, for a hold that occurred before the change in which the counter value of the hold-continuation counter SM22c becomes 0, the hold display mode does not change to the special display mode before the change, and at the start of the change (step 2066). It will change to the special display mode.

  In the second embodiment, the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with a hold is added even during execution of the pre-reading effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may display. In such a configuration, the addition of the counter value of the continuation-with-holding counter SM22c is performed even during the execution of the prefetch effect, similarly to the processing of the present example, and the hold is performed at the end of the prefetch effect. It is desirable that the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c be displayed again (the counter value added during execution of the prefetch effect is taken into account). Such a configuration is more suitable when performing a look-ahead effect (so-called look-ahead zone effect) that indicates the existence of a hold with a high jackpot expectation by shifting the stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the suspension information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2126 (second) to step 2132 (second) and step 2900 (second). That is, in step 2110, if the newly generated hold is the hold of the first main game side, in step 2126 (second), the schematic storage information display control means SM22 sets the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not the simultaneous pending change effect execution changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2128 (second), the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the holding continuation counter SM22c, and the counter value is a prefetch inhibition value (21 to 25). It is determined whether it is not. If Yes in step 2128 (second), the process moves to step 2150. In the second embodiment, when the counter value of the continuation-with-suspend counter SM22c is the look-ahead inhibition value (21 to 25), that is, immediately before the execution of the simultaneous holding change effect, the execution of the simultaneous holding change effect and the look-ahead effect are performed. In order not to overlap with the execution of the prefetching, the prefetching effect is not executed.

  If the new hold is a trigger hold in step 2112, in step 2900 (second), the schematic diagram holding information display control means SM22 executes a first main game look-ahead hold content determination process described later. The process moves to 2114.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), in step 2130 (second), the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 specially changes the hold display mode of the new hold (first main game side hold). The display mode (the same display mode as the hold display mode that will be changed in the simultaneous hold change effect) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2116. As described above, in the second embodiment, the hold that has occurred at the time of the change related to the execution of the simultaneous hold change effect is configured to be displayed in the special display mode.

  In addition, after executing the second main game winning prefetch determination processing in step 2200, in step 2131 (second), the schematic storage information display control means SM22 refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. It is determined whether the new hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2131 (second), the second main game prefetch pending content determination processing (the prefetch pending content determination processing in the present embodiment has the same processing content) is executed in step 2250, and then the step is executed. The process proceeds to 2132 (second), and if No, the process proceeds to step 2132 (second) without executing the process of step 2250. Next, in step 2132 (second), the placement suspension information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the suspension other than the trigger suspension to be “white”, and proceeds to step 2116.

Here, in the second embodiment, at the timing when the hold of the first main game side has occurred, if the hold of the second main game side exists, the process regarding the prefetching of the first main game side is reset. (The first main game prefetch execution flag is turned off, the information indicating that the trigger is on hold, the information on the hold is reset, and the hold display mode is reset). Or, at the timing when the change of the second main game side has started), it may be configured to be executed when the hold of the first main game side exists, that is, the look-ahead related to the first main game side During the performance of the effect, it may be configured such that the second main game side does not have the hold (in the second embodiment, the second main game side holds the first main game side). Since the game is digested prior to the hold, There When occurring, since the order in which the digestion of the trigger hold from being changed). In addition, even when the second main game side has a hold, the prefetching effect according to the first main game side may be configured to be executable. In particular, during the execution of the prefetching effect according to the first main game side. (For example, during the execution of a series of continuous effects over the three holdings), if the second main game side interrupts the holding (for example, it is executed when the first holding is used). If the interruption occurs during the continuous production, the look-ahead production in the middle of the execution is temporarily suspended (the continuous production performed at the time of digestion of the first hold is completed, and then, at the time of the second digestion of the hold) May be temporarily interrupted), and may be resumed after the interrupted symbol change of the second main game side is completed (for example, temporarily interrupted). The continuous production and maintenance performed at the time of the second digestion It may be configured to perform a continuous production which is scheduled to run at the time of the three eyes of digestion).

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prize determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2750 (second), step 2800 (second), step 2850 (second), and steps 2180 (second) to step 2184 (second). That is, in step 2160, when there is no hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold, in step 2750 (second), the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k performs a huge hold look-ahead determination process described later. Execute Next, in step 2800 (second), the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination unit SM26k executes a skewering reserved look-ahead determination process described later. Next, in step 2850 (second), the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination unit SM26k executes a hold assignment look-ahead determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

On the other hand, when the second main game hold exists in the hold in step 2152, in step 2180 (second), the hold look-ahead effect executability determining means SM26k resets (clears to zero) the hold-continue counter SM22c. Next, in step 2182 (second), the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether the first main game look-ahead execution flag (the huge reserved look-ahead execution flag, Turn off the skewing hold prefetch execution flag and the hold allocation prefetch execution flag). The giant hold prefetch execution flag is a flag that is turned on in step 2766, the skewing hold prefetch execution flag is turned on in step 2818, and the hold allocation prefetch execution flag is turned on in step 2868. Next, in step 2184 (second), the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines from the information on the hold temporarily stored in the storage plan holding information temporary storage means SM22b that the information indicates “trigger hold”. Is deleted and all the hold display modes are changed to “white” (when there is no hold in the hold with the information indicating that the trigger is hold, and all the hold display modes are “white”). Shifts to the next process without executing this process), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2112). In the board configuration of the second embodiment, in the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state), a game is played by left-handing (continue firing game balls toward the left side of the board). Since it is configured to proceed and the second main game hold does not occur (or is unlikely to occur), in step 2152, if the second main game hold exists in the hold, the processing related to the prefetch and Although all the counter values of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c are cleared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing of clearing the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c in step 2180 (second) is not executed. Is also good. In addition, as a board surface configuration different from the second embodiment, a configuration in which the second main game hold can occur even in the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened for a long time in the normal game state). In the case of a configuration having a distribution starting port unit C50 and a configuration in which the first main game hold and the second main game hold can alternately occur in the normal game state, etc. A configuration in which the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold is not cleared is more suitable.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the huge hold prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not all stop symbols of the hold before the new hold are "HB" symbols. I do. Here, in the second embodiment, in the non-time shortened game state, all the fluctuation time related to the “HB” symbol is a short fluctuation time (15 seconds or less). All of the holding stop symbols are configured to be "HB" symbols. (Other symbols may cause a doubt to the player, for example, a reach change is executed before the trigger holding is exhausted.) ).

  In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a huge hold prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2762. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2754, in step 2758, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new hold stop symbol is "HB" or "HC". It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a huge reserved look-ahead lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and proceeds to step 2762. It should be noted that in the case of Yes in step 2754, that is, when the new hold is a hold with a big hit, the huge hold look-ahead lottery is configured to be executed. (2) The number of rounds to be executed is large (for example, 16R), which may be a big hit, etc. In such a case, a huge hold look-ahead lottery is executed even at the time of a loss. In the event of a big hit, (1) or (2) may be configured. In the case of a loss, the giant holding prefetch lottery is not executed, and when the giant holding display is performed, (1) or (2) ) May be determined.

  Next, in step 2762, the reserved prefetch effect execution availability determination unit SM26k refers to the executed prefetch lottery result, and determines whether or not the huge pending prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination unit SM26k adds information indicating that the trigger is “trigger hold” to the new hold won in the huge hold prefetch lottery. Next, in step 2766, the pending look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the huge pending look-ahead execution flag in the flag area of the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and executes the following processing {step 2800 (second Move on to processing (2) of ()). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2752, step 2758, or step 2762, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 2800 (second)}.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the skewing suspension prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2800 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2802, the reserved look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the circuit diagram pending information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the huge pending look-ahead execution flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, it is configured that the giant hold look-ahead effect and the skewered hold look-ahead effect are not executed at the same time.

In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and all the stop symbols before the new hold are “HB” symbols. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2804, in step 2806, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the new hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the pending prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a skewering prefetching lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2814. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2806, in step 2810, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold stop symbol is “HC”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2810, in step 2812, the pending prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a skewing pending prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20), and proceeds to step 2814.

  Next, in step 2814, the pending prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the executed prefetching lottery result and determines whether or not the skewering pending prefetching lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2814, in step 2816, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information indicating “trigger hold” to the new hold won in the skewering hold look-ahead lottery. Next, in step 2818, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the skewering hold look-ahead execution flag in the flag area of the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and executes the following processing {step 2850 (second Move on to processing (2) of ()). Note that also in the case of No in step 2802, step 2804, step 2810, or step 2814, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 2850 (second)}.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the pending assignment prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (second) in FIG. 38 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2852, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the circuit diagram hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the huge hold look-ahead execution flag is off. Here, in the second embodiment, the giant hold look-ahead effect and the hold split hold look-ahead effect are not executed at the same time, but the skewering hold look-ahead effect and the hold split look-ahead effect can be executed simultaneously.

  In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and all the stop symbols of the hold before the new hold are "HB" symbols. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the new hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the pending prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26 k executes a prefetch lottery lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to step 2864. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2856, in step 2860, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the new stop stop symbol is "HB" or "HC". It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2860, in step 2862, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination unit SM26k executes a hold split look-ahead lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100), and proceeds to step 2864. In the second embodiment, in the step 2860, when the new stop symbol is “HB” or “HC”, the hold allocation look-ahead lottery is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the type of the new suspending stop symbol (that is, even if the new suspending stop symbol is “HA”), it may be configured to execute the hold assignment prefetch lottery.

Next, in step 2864, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the executed look-ahead lottery result and determines whether or not the hold split look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2864, in step 2866, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k adds information indicating that the trigger is "hold" to the new hold won in the hold allocation look-ahead lottery. Next, in step 2868, the hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k turns on the hold assignment look-ahead execution flag in the flag area of the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the next process (the process of step 2112). Move to It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2852, step 2854, step 2860 or step 2864, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2112).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, there are three types of look-ahead effects, and not only the effect form of the look-ahead effect, but also the conditions of the stop symbols that can be held as triggers and the look-ahead effects that can be executed simultaneously are different. It is configured. In addition, in all the pre-reading effects, the condition of the stop symbol of the hold before the trigger hold is only “HB” (losing symbol having a short fluctuation of 15 seconds or less). Can be expected, and a situation can be prevented in which the player mistakenly considers the hold before the trigger to be the trigger hold. Note that the simultaneous hold change effect is different from the condition of whether or not the three types of look-ahead effects are trigger hold, and the hold display mode and the variable display mode of all the hold changes regardless of the stop symbol related to the hold. Will be done.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, the configurations relating to the symbol type to be stopped and the prefetch lottery winning probability are summarized as follows: (1) The tendency of selecting a lost symbol depends on the number of reservations (variable mode selection candidates differ depending on the number of reservations). (Dependent tendency to obtain) or non-dependent number of reservations (dependent tendency in which variation mode selection candidates do not differ depending on the number of reservations). (2) When it is “HB”, the selection tendency is a dependency on the number of reservations, and when it is “HC”, the selection tendency is a dependency on the number of reservations. (3) When the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is “HC”, the certain hold is used for the prefetch lottery than when the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is “HB”. The probability of winning is high (the probability of changing the display mode of the reserved image is high). (4) When the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a hold is a big hit symbol, the certain hold wins the prefetch lottery than when the symbol to be stopped due to a change related to a certain hold is “HB”. Is configured to be high (the probability of changing the display mode of the reserved image is high). The win rate of the prefetch lottery may be a relative win rate considering all prefetch lotteries such as a huge prefetch lottery, a skewering prefetch lottery, a hold split prefetch lottery, or a giant hold prefetch lot only. One type of prefetch lottery may be used. Further, as a configuration of the second embodiment, when the symbol scheduled to be stopped due to a certain suspension change is a big hit symbol, the symbol to be stopped due to a certain suspension change is more prefetched than when the symbol is "HC". It may be configured such that the selection probability is high that the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the certain hold is determined as the jackpot determination (or the jackpot expectation degree is high).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the first main game prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 (second) in FIG. 37 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2902, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and refers to whether or not the giant suspension prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the suspension display mode of the trigger suspension to be the huge preparation suspension display mode, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114).

On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 2902, at Step 2906, the placement suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the placement suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the cut-away pre-reading execution flag is on. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2906, in step 2908, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the suspension allocation look-ahead execution flag is off. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2908, in step 2910, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 determines the trigger display suspension display mode to be the normal display mode (white in this example), and performs the next process (the process of step 2114). ).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2906 or 2908, in other words, if the hold assignment prefetch execution flag is on, in step 2912, the schematic diagram holding information display control means SM22 changes the hold indication form of the trigger hold to the hold assignment preparation. The display mode is determined. Next, in step 2914, the layout suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the suspension assignment scenario determination table SM22ta and refers to the expected degree display scenario of the suspension assignment preparation display mode (the suspension assignment display mode displayed in the suspension assignment preparation display mode. The scenario (numerical scenario representing the degree of expectation that changes to the display mode) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2114).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of the hold split scenario determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, when it is determined that the hold display mode becomes the hold split preparation display mode, when the hold to be the trigger hold is awarded, and until the change related to the trigger hold after the win time, Is displayed, the degree of expectation that the change suggestion display mode becomes the hold split display mode is displayed. Note that the larger the initial value (the degree of expectation displayed at the time of winning of the trigger hold), the higher the expectation at which the trigger hold becomes a big hit, and the number of holds at the time of winning of the trigger hold is increased. The configuration is such that the larger the number, the easier the initial value is to select a smaller number. It should be noted that the expectation degree display scenario of each hold split preparation display mode is configured to be equally selected. If the stop symbol determined to be the trigger hold is other than “HB”, at the time of the change related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold becomes the hold split display mode, and When the determined stop symbol is “HB”, the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold is a hold split preparation display mode (details will be described later). Note that the content of the expectation degree display scenario may be changed, and the type of the number (display indicating the degree of expectation that the change suggestion display mode is the hold split display mode) may be changed. Is desirably configured so as not to decrease as the fluctuation approaches (in order to give the player an expectation that the number will increase).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2320 (second) to step 2330 (second) and step 2950 (second). That is, after determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol in step 2306, in step 2320 (second), the schematic display content determining means SM21n refers to the schematic display-related information temporary storage means SM21b and performs the variation. It is determined whether or not the suggestion display mode (a display object and a display mode when displaying the same or similar display mode as the display mode of the digested hold related to the change in the change) is a special display mode. . In the case of Yes in step 2320 (second), in step 2322 (second), the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the special hold variable effect content determination table based on the information on the stop symbol of the main game time. , A special change suggestion display mode (this change suggestion display mode in a change related to suspension of the special display mode, details thereof will be described later), and a special announcement effect content (an announcement effect executed at the time of the change according to the special hold display mode) Is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2308.

Here, the lower left part of the figure is an example of a special hold variation effect content determination table according to the second embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the special change suggestion display mode and the special notice effect content (the notice effect executed at the time of change according to the special hold display condition) are different depending on the stop symbol. In the second embodiment, the content (type) of the notice effect is different based on the selected special change suggestion display mode. In addition, in the variation relating to the suspension of the special display mode in the second embodiment, the announcement effect is configured to be different depending on the stop symbol of the main game symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery is executed and the lottery is performed. May be configured to differ depending on the result, or may be configured to differ depending on other factors such as a fluctuating time.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2320 (second), in step 2324 (second), the schematic display content determining means SM21n refers to the counter value of the continuation counter SM22c with hold, and the counter value is simultaneously changed. (In this example, it is 21 to 25, which is in the same range as the prefetch inhibition value). In the case of Yes in step 2324 (second), in step 2326 (second), the schematic display content determining means SM21n refers to the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b and executes any of the first main game prefetching. It is determined whether or not the flags (the huge pending prefetch execution flag, the skewer pending prefetch execution flag, and the hold allocation prefetch execution flag) are on. In the case of Yes in step 2326 (second), in step 2950 (second), the layout display content determining means SM21n executes a prefetching effect content determining process described later, and proceeds to step 2308.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2324 (second), at step 2328 (second), the schematic display content determining means SM21n determines execution of the simultaneous holding change stimulating effect, and proceeds to step 2330 (second). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2326 (second), the processing shifts to step 2330 (second).

  Here, the lower right part of the figure is an example of the simultaneous change change stimulating effect according to the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, at the time of executing the simultaneous holding change inducing effect, the holding display image, the change suggestion displaying image, the simultaneous holding change inducing effect, and holding with hold are displayed on the effect display device SG. The counter value and the decorative symbol during the change are displayed, and the simultaneous pending change inducing effect is displayed so as not to overlap with the other notice effects. This effect is an effect that informs the player that the counter value of the hold continuation counter SM22c is close to the simultaneous hold change effect execution value (in this example, 25). In consideration of the current counter value of the continuation counter with holding SM22c and the number of holds on the first main game side, it is almost impossible for the counter value to reach the simultaneous hold change effect execution value (25 in this example). When it is definite (determined when the second main game hold does not occur before the arrival and does not become a big hit), it may be configured to notify the player that it is substantially definite. . Although the details will be described later, in this example, the hold display and / or the change suggestion display displayed near or in the hold display and / or the change suggestion display in the display area SG10. The relevant effect display is referred to as holding supplementary information, and in the same drawing, the display relating to the simultaneous holding change inducing effect is the holding supplementary information.

  Next, in step 2330 (second), the decoration display content determining means SM21n determines the announcement effect content based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game time, and proceeds to step 2308.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2950 (second) in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2952, the layout display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the giant hold prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the wiring diagram display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes at step 2954, at step 2955, the layout display content determining means SM21n turns off the giant hold prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2956, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the change is “HB”. Y at step 2956
In the case of es, in step 2958, the design display content determining means SM21n displays the change suggestion display mode in the huge hold display mode at the start of the change, and based on the information on the stop symbol and the change mode of the main game symbol. Then, the contents of the announcement effect are determined, and the flow shifts to step 2964.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2956, in step 2960, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the announcement effect content based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2964. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2954, in step 2962, the schematic display content determining means SM21n sets the notice effect to a giant hold-inducing effect (expects the player to change to hold related to the hold in the giant preparation hold display mode). Is determined, and the flow shifts to step 2964. It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 2952, the processing shifts to step 2964.

  Next, in step 2964, the layout display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the skewing hold prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2964, in step 2966, the wiring diagram display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2966, in step 2967, the layout display content determining means SM21n turns off the skewing hold prefetch execution flag in the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2968, the circuit diagram display content determination means SM21n changes the change suggestion display mode to the skewered hold display mode during the change (for example, at a timing of 10 seconds after the start of the change), and sets the main game symbol. The announcement effect content is determined based on the information on the stop symbol and the fluctuation mode of the above, and the process shifts to step 2972.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2966, in step 2970, the schematic display content determining means SM21n changes the advance notice effect to the hold change and hang-up effect (for the player, the hold and / or hold split look-ahead in the skewering preparation hold display mode). It is determined that the lottery has a feeling of expectation up to the change related to the suspension of the lottery, and the process proceeds to step 2972. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2964, the processing shifts to step 2972.

  Next, in step 2972, the layout display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the hold assignment prefetch execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2972, in step 2974, the wiring diagram display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the fluctuation is a fluctuation relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2974, in step 2975, the layout display content determining means SM21n turns off the hold allocation look-ahead execution flag in the flag area of the layout display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2976, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the change is "HB". In the case of Yes in step 2976, in step 2978, the layout display content determining means SM21n displays the change suggestion display mode in the hold split display mode at the start of the change, and relates to the stop symbol and the change mode of the main game symbol. Based on the information, the content of the announcement effect is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2976, in step 2980, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the announcement effect content based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the main game symbol, and performs the next process (step 2308). Processing). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2974, in step 2982, the schematic display content determining means SM21n changes the advance notice effect to a change-on-hold effect (for the player, the expectation up to the change related to the hold which is the hold-split preparation display mode). It is determined to be an effect that excites the feeling), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2972, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2308). In the second embodiment, the skewing hold prefetching effect and the hold split prefetching effect are configured to be able to be executed at the same time, so that the process of step 2968 and the process of step 2978 can be executed at the same time. . In the processing of step 2958, step 2960, step 2968, step 2978, and step 2980, the content of the change suggestion display related to the trigger suspension is determined.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the change suggestion display mode management process according to the subroutine of step 3150 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3156 (second) and step 3162 (second). That is, if the symbol change is the change related to the first main game side in step 3154, step 3156 (second) In the second), the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the change suggestion scenario determination table (a table for determining a changing scenario of the change suggestion display mode during the execution of the prefetch effect, and details will be described later). ), The change suggestion display scenario of the first main game side is determined and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS).

  Further, after the change suggestion display mode relating to the first main game side is determined to be “none” in step 3160 and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), step 3162 (second) Then, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 reads the change suggestion scenario determination table (a table for determining a scenario in which the change suggestion display mode changes during execution of the pre-reading effect, details of which will be described later). With reference to the second main game side, the change suggestion display scenario is determined and set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the change suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of the big hit) and the change suggestion scenario determination table (at the time of loss). The present embodiment is configured to determine the change suggestion display scenario related to trigger suspension, which is a scenario in which the change suggestion display mode is changing during execution of the pre-reading effect, with reference to the change suggestion scenario determination table. I have. The type of the change suggestion display mode that can be selected when the change suggestion scenario is determined with reference to the change suggestion scenario determination table (both at the time of the big hit and the loss) is “rainbow”, “red”, “blue”. It is configured such that three display timings (display mode change timings) of “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” can exist in one symbol change. In the second embodiment, “timing 1” is a symbol variation start timing, and the variation suggestion display mode displayed at “timing 1” is “timing 2” (for example, during symbol variation, It is configured to be able to change at two timings, that is, during the symbol fluctuation after the temporary stop in the continuous fluctuation) and “timing 3” (for example, during normal reach and during super reach). In addition, "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3" are in order from the timing near the variation start timing in the symbol variation. In the second embodiment, “timing 1” is set to a display mode other than “white”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the symbol change start timing, the change suggestion display mode is set to “initial display mode”. The display may be configured to be displayed in “white” and the change suggestion display mode may be changed at a plurality of timings during the change (for example, as the change time elapses from the change start timing, “white” → “white”). Blue ”→“ red ”). In addition, the timing at which the change suggestion display mode may change may be increased or decreased. For example, each time a pseudo continuous symbol (temporary stop symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is temporarily stopped. The display mode may be configured to be able to change during the symbol fluctuation in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, or the timing at which the normal reach effect is executed may be set to “timing 3-1”. ", The timing when the first half of the super reach is started may be set as" timing 3-2 ", and the timing when the second half of the super reach is started may be set as" timing 3-3 "so that the display mode can be changed a plurality of times. . In addition, when the change suggestion display mode changes, a change effect (an effect for changing the change suggestion display mode) may be included, and in such a case, the change effect is performed. Even if it occurs, there may be a case where the change suggestion display mode does not change, or a change effect may not occur at a timing when a change effect can occur. Further, as a type of the change effect to be generated, a change effect may be provided so that when the change effect is displayed, the change suggestion display mode is definitely changed. Further, the changing suggestion display mode that changes is ranked up (for example, the color changes from “blue” to “red”, but does not change from “red” to “blue”). Alternatively, the expectation of the big hit may be increased as the change timing is later (for example, the expectation of the big hit may be higher when the change is made at “timing 3” than at “timing 2”). In the second embodiment, the change suggestion display is executed on the sub-sub side in accordance with the change suggestion display scenario set in the processing of the same figure, and the symbol change is the change related to the first main game side. In some cases, the variation suggestion display mode of the first main game side is displayed, and the variation suggestion display mode of the second main game side is not displayed, while the symbol variation is a variation relating to the second main game side. In this case, the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side is displayed, and the change suggestion display mode of the first main game side is not displayed. If the change suggestion display mode is “none”, the display is displayed in “white”. In the second embodiment, the change suggestion display is configured to be displayed regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (1) When the probability change game state and the time reduction game state are set, May not be displayed. (2) It may be configured such that it is more difficult to be displayed (the probability of being displayed is lower) in the probability varying gaming state and the time reducing gaming state than in the other gaming states. Further, in the second embodiment, when the change of the hold display is executed, the hold display mode can be changed only once in one symbol change, whereas when the change suggestion change is executed, one symbol change is performed. , The change suggestion display mode is configured to be changeable three times (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3), and the change suggestion display is more likely to change in one symbol change than the hold display. Has become. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the change of the hold display and the change of the change suggestion display are executed, the change may be performed with some action (for example, a notice effect).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 35 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2442 (second) and step 2444 (second). That is, after the main game symbol is stopped in step 2426, in step 2442 (second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the first main game side design holding counter, and the counter value is 0. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2442 (second), in step 2444 (second), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets (clears to zero) the holding continued counter SM22c, and proceeds to step 2428. On the other hand, if No in step 2442 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 47 is an image diagram of a simultaneous hold change effect execution in the second embodiment. First, under the situation that the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is 22, the simultaneous holding change change effect is executed because the counter value is 22. Then, after the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next fluctuation starts, the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c becomes 25, the display of the counter value is hidden, and the simultaneous holding change effect is executed. Is changed to the special display mode (egg display mode).

After all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes have changed to the special display mode, the stop symbol of the change is “HA”, “3A”, “4A”, “5A”, “1K” or “2K”. In this case, “people” is displayed as the special change suggestion display mode at the change start timing (immediately after the simultaneous change change effect is executed). After that, for the same change, a change time suggestion effect (effect indicating the length of the change time of the change) is executed because the special change suggestion display mode is “person”. In addition, when the special change suggestion display mode is “person”, it may be configured to suggest an effect mode (reach type or the like) in addition to the length of the change time.

  On the other hand, after all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes have changed to the special display mode, when the stop symbol of the change is “HB”, the change start timing (immediately after the simultaneous hold change effect is executed). “Star” is displayed as the special change suggestion display mode. Thereafter, at the same change, a special game effect presentation effect (a process for explaining the characteristic portion of the game characteristics of the gaming machine) is executed because the special change suggestion display mode is “star”. In addition, when the special change suggestion display mode is “star”, basically, a playability explanation effect is executed, but the change related to the execution of the effect is a change that causes a big hit. In some cases, it may be configured to be able to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, such as “Gekiatsu” (may be executed in a part of a change that causes loss).

  On the other hand, after all the hold display modes and the change suggestion display modes have changed to the special display mode, if the stop symbol of the change is “HC”, “7A” or “9A”, the change start timing (simultaneous hold Immediately after the change effect is executed), “chick” is displayed as the special change suggestion display mode. Thereafter, at the same change, a special effect suggestion effect (effect indicating the appropriate result of the change) is executed because the special change suggestion display mode is “chick”.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the content (type) of the notice effect in the certain variation differs depending on the type of the special variation suggestion display mode (or the stop symbol of the main game symbol) in the certain variation. It is configured to be. It should be noted that the announcement effect relating to the suspension of the special display mode may be executed by an operation of the player (for example, pressing the sub input button SB). In addition, when the special change suggestion display mode is “star”, a notice effect is executed by a player's operation, and when the special change suggestion display mode is “person” or “chick”, It may be configured to be executed without intervention of a user.

  The gaming machine according to the second embodiment provides a service (game machine interlocking) that provides a player with a privilege (non-gaming media privilege) that is not related to the gaming media and that creates a new interest using the non-gaming media privilege. Service) to the player. Examples of the service include a content stage distribution service, a gaming machine effect custom service, and the like. The content stage distribution service refers to a mobile communication terminal from a web site based on a game result on a gaming machine. Is a service that distributes specific image data, audio data, etc. in stages, and the gaming machine effect custom service is generated on the gaming machine based on the personal data of the player registered on the website. This service allows a player to arbitrarily change image data and audio data used in various effects. In addition, the service may be applied to the simultaneous hold change effect, for example, the type of the special change suggestion display mode related to the hold changed in the simultaneous hold change effect or the change in the hold related to the special display mode. The type of the result of the effect is stored, and the service is provided depending on the type of the special change suggestion display mode executed and / or the result of the effect (the number of types, whether or not an effect that is difficult to execute is generated). It may be configured to obtain. In addition, a point associated with the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c (for example, the counter value becomes a point when the counter value immediately before reset is 10 or more) is added to the player. Alternatively, the service may be provided by the points. In such a case, it is preferable that the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is not reset even if it reaches a predetermined value (in this example, 25).

In addition, the provided service is executed during a stand-by demonstration (for example, when a game ball is not detected in the winning opening for a predetermined time, or when it is determined that the game has not progressed for a predetermined time, etc.). For example, the service may be configured so that the player can select a background effect in a standby effect (or the type of the selectable background effect changes). Is also good.

  Next, FIG. 47 is an illustration of a prefetching effect execution in the second embodiment. First, an example of a giant pending look-ahead effect will be described. First, the decoration symbol fluctuates under the situation where the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. Thereafter, during the same fluctuation, a new hold occurs, the new hold wins the huge hold look-ahead lottery, and the selected hold is displayed in a huge preparation hold display mode. After that, the next fluctuation is started, and the giant hold-in-promotion effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next change is started, and a huge hold display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. In this example, in the case of winning the giant hold pre-read lottery, the giant hold display mode is always displayed as the change suggestion display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern (gase pattern) in which the huge hold display mode is not displayed at the start of the fluctuation according to the above may be provided. (For example, a number is added for each change, and when the number reaches 100, it is determined that the huge hold display mode is displayed, etc.) ).

  Next, an example of a skewer holding prefetching effect will be described. First, the decoration symbol fluctuates under the situation where the counter value of the with-hold continuation counter SM22c is 10. Thereafter, during the same change, a new hold is generated, and the new hold is skewered to win the hold prefetch lottery (the hold display mode is “white”). After that, the next change is started, and the pending change stimulating effect is displayed on the effect display device SG. Thereafter, at a timing 10 seconds after the main game symbol is stopped three times and the next fluctuation is started, the fluctuation suggestion display mode is changed from the normal display mode (white display mode) to the skewered display mode. In this example, in the case where the skewering hold look-ahead lottery is won, the skewering hold display mode is always displayed as the change suggestion display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern that does not change to the skewering hold display mode on the way (a pattern that does not change while remaining white, a so-called gasket pattern) may be provided. An effect indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not to change to the mode may be executed. Further, the hold display mode is changed in the change before the change related to the trigger hold (several types of changeable hold display modes are provided, and the big hit expectation increases with each change). You may be comprised so that a big hit expectation degree may be suggested by a change suggestion display mode. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold display mode can be changed to a skewered hold display mode during the change before the change related to the trigger hold. In the case of such a configuration, a pattern in which the lightning is stabbed on hold to skewer the hold display mode and a pattern in which the lightning is not stabbed in the hold and the skewer is not in the hold display mode (the hold display mode does not change) (a so-called gasp pattern) ) May be provided.

  Next, an example of the hold split look-ahead effect will be described. Note that, in the second embodiment, the execution mode of the change suspension fanning effect is the same as the effect content of the skewering suspension prefetching effect, and thus the details are omitted. In addition, you may comprise so that the change hold | maintenance production | production effect concerning the hold split look-ahead effect and the change hold | maintenance production effect concerning a skewered hold look-ahead effect may be different. In the hold split look-ahead effect, after execution of the hold change fanning effect, the main game symbol stops three times, the next change is started, and a hold split display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. Note that, similarly to the giant hold look-ahead effect, a pattern (gase pattern) that does not change to the hold-split display mode during the change related to the trigger hold may also be provided in the hold split look-ahead effect.

Next, an example of a case where the hold split prefetching effect and the skewering prefetching effect are simultaneously executed will be described. Note that, until the execution of the change suspension inducing effect, since the effect content is the same as that of the skewering hold prefetching effect, the details are omitted. Note that the hold split preparation display mode displays “50”, which is the degree of expectation that the hold split display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode (“100” indicates that the change is deterministic). Become). After execution of the hold change provoking effect, the main game symbol is stopped three times, the next change is started, and the hold split display mode is displayed as the change suggestion display mode. Thereafter, in the middle of the change of the same change (at a timing of 10 seconds after the start of the change), the display changes to the change suggestion display mode in which the hold split display mode overlaps the hold split display mode. Also, in the pre-reading effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the hold display mode can be changed to a skewing hold display mode in the middle of the change before the change related to the trigger hold, or the above-described gasp pattern may be provided. In addition, when the hold prefetch effect and the stab hold prefetch effect are performed in an overlapping manner, the lightning is relatively stuck on the hold compared to the case where the hold prefetch effect is performed alone without overlapping. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the pattern in the skewering hold display mode increases (the frequency of the gasp pattern decreases).

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the simultaneous hold change effect can be executed when the predetermined number of changes (25 times in the present example) does not become zero. By configuring and providing a plurality of look-ahead effects having different execution conditions, effect modes, and hold change timings, it is possible to provide a player with various effects related to hold and a special effect performed at every predetermined number of changes. Can progress the game without getting tired.

  In the second embodiment, the display timing of the huge preparation hold display mode and the hold split preparation display mode is configured to be the hold occurrence timing (winning timing). However, the present invention is not limited to this. From then on, the display may be configured to be displayed at a timing before the start of the change related to the trigger hold (for example, next change start, next change middle, next change start, next change middle timing, etc.).

  In the second embodiment, the huge hold display mode and the hold split display mode are configured to be displayed only as the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be displayed as the suspension display mode (the suspension display mode can be changed) at the fluctuation start timing (for example, next fluctuation start, next fluctuation start timing, etc.) before the fluctuation start related to the suspension.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, the holding continuation counter SM22c is an addition counter, but is not limited thereto, and may be a subtraction counter. Further, the simultaneous holding change effect can be executed by maintaining the state where the number of holdings is not 0 for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 25 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Even if the number of suspensions becomes 0 on the way), it may be configured to be executed every predetermined number of times of change.

  In the second embodiment, at the time of executing the simultaneous hold change effect, the hold display mode is changed to one type of special display mode, and thereafter, a plurality of types of special change suggestion display modes can be displayed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a change to a plurality of special display modes can be made when the simultaneous hold change effect is executed.

  In the second embodiment, the prefetch lottery is executed according to the type of the symbol to be stopped for the new hold (whether the symbol is a big hit symbol, a lost symbol “HB”, or a lost symbol “HC”). Although it is configured to determine whether or not to perform, the determination is not limited to this. For example, the determination may be made based on a new suspension fluctuation time (for example, whether or not the fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time), or a fluctuation mode. The determination may be made based on the random number delimiter information (for example, whether the variation mode random number delimiter information is the delimiter 3). When the determination is made based on the variation mode random number delimiter information, the variation mode group ((HB), “HB”, or “HC” can be used to determine whether the stop symbol is “HA”, “HB”, or “HC” based on the variation mode random number delimiter information. Or, it may be configured to be the variation mode random number delimiter information.

  Further, in this example, the fluctuation time is divided into two blocks, that is, an A block, which is a period before the reach fluctuation, and a B block, which is a period after the reach fluctuation, and is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which a variation addition time and / or a variation fixed time are added to form one variation.

  In this example, the fixed fluctuation time is set to a long time (equal to the fluctuation time to reach, for example, 30 seconds) so that the reach effect can be executed during the fixed fluctuation time. You may. Alternatively, the reach effect may be executed during the change time, and the pseudo reach effect may be executed during the change fixed time, where the change time <the change fixed time. For example, the fixed change time is set to 90 seconds, the change time is set to 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the change time is set to “123” which is a special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance eye) (“4 × 4”). The left and right rows may be the same stop symbol, and the middle row of stop symbols may be a special symbol.) Then, in the subsequent fixed time of fluctuation, to fluctuate whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a loss Is performed, and then an effect is performed such that the decorative symbol stop symbol becomes “444”.

  Further, in the present example, the configuration may be such that the shorter the fixed number, the more easily the variable fixed time can be selected as the variable fixed time as the number of suspensions increases.

  In addition, in this example, when the suspension occurs, the result of the suspension, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information related to the suspension can be transmitted to the sub side. Even in the case where the game state is different between the time and the time when the generated suspension is consumed, it is possible to determine whether or not the success / failure result and the variation mode group are the same (whether or not different). Therefore, when the success / failure result and the variation mode group are the same, even if the game state is different between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the generated hold, even if the pre-reading effect is executed across the game state Alternatively, depending on the type of the prefetching effect to be executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a prefetching effect is performed across game states and a case where the prefetching effect is not executed.

  In addition, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and a pre-reading effect whose execution is different depending on the variation mode of the trigger hold and a pre-read effect that can be executed regardless of the change mode of the trigger hold may be provided. Also, a plurality of prefetch effects may be configured to be able to occur at the same time, a plurality of prefetch effects may be started at the same time when the prefetch effect starts, or another prefetch effect starts during the execution of one prefetch effect. May be configured. In addition, the timing of rank-up of the look-ahead effect (for example, the expectation of the big hit increases such as the change of the reserved display color from “blue to red”) may be executed at the same time, or the rank may be changed at a different timing for each look-ahead effect. It may be configured to be up. Also, a plurality of types of look-ahead effects may be provided, for example, a look-ahead effect in which the hold display mode changes, a chance look-ahead effect that indicates the expectation of a big hit in a stop effect of a decorative symbol (combination of stop symbols), a background. A change look-ahead effect, a countdown notice look-ahead effect, or the like may be provided. In addition, the plurality of prefetching effects are types or combinations of prefetching effects that can occur at the same time, a rank-up degree when any one of them occurs (one-step UP, two-step UP, not UP), and a display mode that appears first. The jackpot expectation degree, etc. may be configured to be different depending on the design to be stopped related to the hold that triggered the look-ahead lottery. For example, when the look-ahead effect related to the “HC” is executed, the look-ahead related to the “HB” There may be more types or combinations of look-ahead effects that can occur simultaneously than during the effect execution, a higher rank-up degree when any of them occur, a display mode with a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to appear first, and so on. .

In this example, the prefetch lottery is not executed when the trigger hold exists in the hold. However, the condition for not executing the prefetch lottery is not limited to this. If there is a change that causes a change (a change in the main game design that will execute the reach effect), the prefetch lottery may not be executed.

  In addition, as a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present example, during a single change of the main game symbol, after repeatedly performing “temporary stop display of left / middle / right symbol → re-variation (so-called pseudo-variation)” a plurality of times, A configuration in which by stopping the game symbols, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous change which is an effect technique for showing a player as if the main game symbols fluctuated a plurality of times during one change of the main game symbols. May be. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, during the execution of the look-ahead effect, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not performed as the effect during the fluctuation related to the hold that is digested before the trigger hold, but as the effect during the change related to the trigger hold. You may comprise so that pseudo continuous fluctuation | variation can be performed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side changes (displayed in a mode other than the normal display mode “white”) is a plurality of timings (at the start of the change, at the start of the change). 10 seconds after the start), but the timing at which the change suggestion display mode on the second main game side changes (displayed in other than the normal display mode “white”) is one type of timing (at the start of the change). It is only. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode of the second main game side may be configured to be able to change during the symbol change, but in such a case, the first main game is performed. Side and a second main game side (the first type and the first type multifunction peripheral), and the reservation of the second main game side is digested with priority over the reservation of the first main game side, and the first main game side is digested. The gaming machine is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game on the second main game side than the game progresses on the game side, and when the open time extension function is not activated (when the non-time shortened game state is set). ), The change on the second main game side when the open time extension function is activated (in the time reduction game state), rather than the type of timing at which the change suggestion display mode on the first main game side can change during the symbol change. There are fewer types of timings at which the suggestion display mode can change during symbol fluctuation. Be configured is desirable.

(Modification Example 1 from Second Embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the configuration in which the command set to the sub-sub-control unit SS according to the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode can be appropriately executed has been exemplified. In the gaming machine, the command content and the command transmission mode to the sub-sub-control unit according to the hold display mode and the variation suggestion display mode are different from those of the second embodiment. A command transmission mode can be adopted. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example of the second embodiment, and only the points different from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

  The gaming machine according to the first modification of the second embodiment has a variable fixed time timer MP12t for measuring a variable fixed time of a main game symbol.

First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of Steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 9 in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are as follows: step 1412 (second variation 1), step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1850 (second variation 1), and step 1439 (second variation 1) to step 1443 (second variation). Modification 1), that is, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in Step 1410, in Step 1412 (Second Modification 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 stores the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. It is determined whether or not the limited frequency flag (in the first modification example from the second embodiment, which is a limited frequency flag because there is only one limited frequency state) is on. If Yes in step 1412 (second variation 1), in step 1450 (second variation 1), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1650 (second variation 1). The process proceeds to the first modification. On the other hand, if No in step 1412 (second variation 1), the flow shifts to step 1416 to determine the variation mode regarding the main game symbol, and then shifts to step 1850 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1850 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes a variable fixed time determination process, described later, and proceeds to step 1418.

  After turning off the fluctuating flag in step 1434, in step 1439 (second change 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the determined fixed change time to a fixed change time timer. MP12t (decrement timer) is set and the timer is started. Next, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C changes the variation in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The fixed flag is turned on, and the flow shifts to step 1442 (second variation 1).

  If the changing flag is OFF in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C temporarily stores the first and second main game symbol information in step 1441 (second variation 1). With reference to the flag area of the means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation fixing flag is on. If Yes in step 1441 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variation 1). If No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the variation fixed time timer MP12t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. . In the case of Yes in step 1442 (second variation 1), in step 1443 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C stores the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means. The floating fixed state flag in the flag area of the MB 11b-C is turned off, and the flow shifts to step 1436. In the first modification example from the second embodiment, since no small hit is provided and a fixed variation time is provided, the variation start condition in step 1403 is that the special game is not in the special game and the main game symbol The condition is that the game is not fluctuating, the main game symbol is on hold, and the fluctuating time is not fixed.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value is set to the mode A. In the first modification from the second embodiment, the stay mode ( If the stay mode is different, the limited frequency table to be referred to is different). In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table 1), and based on the main game-side random number and the success / failure lottery result, The variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the flow shifts to step 1472. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1464, in step 1470, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table 2) and outputs the main game side random number and the success / failure lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the flow shifts to step 1472. The details of the limited frequency table will be described later.

  Next, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 subtracts (decrements) 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, in step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency change mode determination unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and executes the following processing {step 1850 (second change). The processing shifts to the processing 1) of 1). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1474, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 1850 (second variation 1)}.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a limited frequency stay mode determination table. As shown in the figure, in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, “mode A” and “mode B” exist as limited frequency stay modes, and the stay mode (limited frequency stay mode) Is "mode A", the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1, and if the stay mode is "mode B", the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2. It is configured. In addition, the stay mode is configured to be determined by the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and when the special game ends and shifts to the limited frequency state, the symbol change of the main game symbol is executed 20 times. Each time, "Mode A" → "Mode A" → "Mode B" → "Mode A" is configured. If "Mode A" → "Mode A", the stay mode is the same. However, as will be described later, the stay stage may be different, that is, the change mode determination table (limited frequency table) referred to when determining the change mode managed on the main control board M side is Although the stay stage is the same, the stay stage managed on the side of the sub-control board S can be different). The contents of the limited frequency stay mode determination table may be changed without any problem. The number of types of the stay mode may be three or more, and the range of the limited frequency counter value and the transition mode of the stay mode may be changed in any way. No problem.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the fixed variation time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second variation 1) in FIG. 49 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the symbol fluctuation is limited. With reference to the frequency table, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation has determined the variation mode. If Yes in step 1854, that is, if the symbol variation is the final variation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final variation in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state), in step 1856, the first variation is made. -The second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the variation fixed time of the symbol variation to a long time (a relatively long time is sufficient, in this example, 15 seconds), and performs the next process (step The process proceeds to 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852 or No in step 1854, in step 1858, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variation fixed time of the symbol variation to a short time (relatively short). It suffices if it is time, in this example, 0.2 seconds), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1418). As described above, the fixed fluctuation time of the main game symbol according to the first modification from the second embodiment is the final fluctuation referring to the limited frequency table (in this example, the final fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state). Is configured to take a relatively long time.

  Next, FIG. 52 is an example of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in a first modification example from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that no small hit is provided. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and in the gaming machine having the look-ahead effect configuration shown in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, a small hit is provided similarly to the present embodiment to the second embodiment. And may have a plurality of losing designs.

Next, FIG. 53 is an example of a limited frequency table in a first modification example from the second embodiment. In the first modification example from the second embodiment, the gaming state when referring to the limited frequency table is a probability varying gaming state and a time reducing gaming state, and mainly in the probability varying gaming state and the time reducing gaming state. The game is configured to proceed by changing the second main game symbol. With such a configuration, the fluctuation on the first main gaming side when referring to the limited frequency table is a fluctuation that is not normally executed or hard to be performed (because it is an irregular fluctuation), and therefore the first main gaming side. At the time of the loss, the fluctuation time is relatively longer than that at the time of the loss on the second main game side, and the time for causing the second main game side to hold is secured. On the second main game side, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is the reach fluctuation. In the limited frequency table 1, while the reach fluctuation can be executed at both the time of the big hit and the time of the loss, the limited frequency In Table 2, the reach fluctuation is executed only at the time of the big hit and the reach fluctuation is not executed at the time of the loss. Therefore, when the reach fluctuation occurs at the time of referring to the limited frequency table 2, it is definite that the symbol change becomes the big hit ( The present invention is not limited to this, and it is only necessary that the probability that the symbol change is higher than 50%, that is, the probability that the symbol change when a reach change occurs when referring to the limited frequency table 1 is higher than the probability of a big hit). In the case where the reach fluctuation occurs when referring to the limited frequency table 1, the ratio of the symbol fluctuation to a big hit is about 50%. With this configuration, in the variation example 2 from the second embodiment, which is configured to transition between the situation referring to the limited frequency table 1 and the situation referring to the limited frequency table 2 in the probability-variation gaming state, It is configured to be able to enjoy a game with two game characteristics: a situation in which the jackpot is definite in the case of a reach fluctuation, and a situation in which a jackpot can be expected at 50% in the case of the reach fluctuation. .

  Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 49 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1554 (second modification 1) to step 1560 (second modification 1). The purpose is as a probability variation termination condition in the first modification of the second embodiment. This is to add a predetermined number of changes of the main game symbols after the end of the special game. That is, in step 1554 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in Step 1554 (Second Variation 1), in Step 1556 (Second Variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1558 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in Step 1558 (Second Modification 1), in Step 1560 (Second Modification 1), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game certainty change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Then, the process proceeds to step 1570. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1554 (second variation 1) or step 1558 (second variation 1), the processing shifts to step 1570.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process according to a subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in a first modification example of the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1605 (second variation 1), step 1608 (second variation 1), step 1610 (second variation 1), and step 1615 (second variation 1). After turning on the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (clears to zero) the probability change counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1606. After resetting the time-saving counter MP52c in step 1606 (clearing to zero), in step 1608 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 resets (clears to zero) the limited frequency counter MN52c and proceeds to step 1612. . Also, after turning off the condition device operation flag in step 1614, in step 1615 (second variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 executes the special game winning command (a command related to the fact that the special game has been won. A command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM to transmit the end of the specific game to the sub-main controller SM. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second modification 1) in FIG. 20 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 1783, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 sets the probability change counter MP51c.
Is set to a predetermined number (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1786, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1787, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1788, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MN52c to a predetermined number (80 in this example). Next, in step 1789, the specific game control means MP50 is capable of notifying the sub side that the specific game has been started by the specific game start command (the command relating to the start of the specific game). ) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1790, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. The point of change from the second embodiment is step 3200 (second variation 1). That is, after executing the stay stage determination processing in step 2600, in step 3200 (second variation 1), the sub-control board S Then, an initialization command transmission determination process, which will be described later, is executed, and the flow shifts to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the second main game prize winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 37 in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. A change from the second embodiment is step 2207 (second modification 1). That is, if there is no reservation that makes a big hit in the reservation before the new reservation in step 2206, step 2207 (second modification 1). ), The hold look-ahead effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the last symbol change in the specific game (limited in the first modification example from the second embodiment). The final symbol variation in the frequency state is also the same variation), and it is determined whether or not the digestion schedule is not suspended. In the case of Yes in step 2207 (second variation 1), the prefetch lottery is executed in the processing of step 2208 and thereafter, while in the case of No, it is determined that there is no target for executing the prefetch lottery, and the next processing {step} The processing shifts to 2131 (second) processing (2). As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the final symbol change in the specific game final change, that is, the probability change game state in which the player can stay for 80 changes (the stay stage management counter value is 1). Is configured not to execute the prefetch lottery.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the on-hold occurrence content transmission processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 (second variation 1) in FIG. 37 in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 3062, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and sets a specific game in-progress flag (turned on in step 2654, which will be described later; Is determined to be off. In the case of Yes in step 3062, in step 3064, the schematic diagram hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b to determine whether or not the prefetch effect of the first main game side is being executed. judge. Here, the first main game side look-ahead effect according to the first modification example from the second embodiment is a giant hold look-ahead effect, a skewered hold look-ahead effect, a hold split look-ahead effect, and a hold simultaneous change effect. In the case of Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the suspension display mode after the suspension change for executing the suspension change (after executing the suspension change effect) (transmits to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Will be done). Next, in step 3068, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines the digestion order for executing the suspension change (the display position of the suspension display in the display area SG10, the first digestion order from the left to the fourth digestion order). And the process proceeds to step 3070. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3064, the process proceeds to step 3070.

  Next, in step 3070, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the supplementary information related to the suspension index look-ahead effect (the vicinity display or the suspension display in the display area SG10 is related to the suspension display). A certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed near the hold display, and the like, and a command related to the effect contents are set (hold split preparation display mode, hold change inducing effect, Are set and transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Next, in step 3072, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 displays the change suggestion display supplementary information relating to the hold split look-ahead effect (displayed in the vicinity of or in the change suggestion display in the display area SG10). , An effect display related to the change suggestion display. For example, a number is displayed in the change suggestion display, a character is displayed near the change suggestion display, etc.) A set (hold split display mode, etc. is set and transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, in the display related to the hold split look-ahead effect, the command of the effect content related to the hold display and the effect content related to the change suggestion display is set by another process. It is configured to be.

  Next, in step 3074, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether the supplementary information relating to the huge suspension look-ahead effect (the vicinity display of the suspension display in or in the suspension display in the display area SG10, It is a certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed near the hold display, etc.) and a command related to the effect content is set (a huge preparation display mode, a huge hold-in-promotion effect, a huge The suspended display mode, the background effect, and the like are set and transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS.) Next, in step 3076, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the supplementary information related to the suspension display related to the skewing suspension look-ahead effect (displayed near or in the suspension display in the display area SG10). It is a certain effect display, for example, a number is displayed in the hold display, a character is displayed near the hold display, etc.) and a command related to the effect content is set (hold change inducing effect, skewering hold display mode, effect) The execution timing and the like are set and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS), and the flow shifts to step 3084.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3062, in step 3078, the schematic diagram hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the prefetch effect on the second main game side is being executed. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3078, in step 3080, the wiring diagram pending information display control means SM22 performs a pending change (the above-described pending display mode changes from “white” to “red” or the like). A later hold display mode (for example, “red”) is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). Next, in step 3082, the schematic diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets the digestion order of the suspension (the position of the suspension display, for example, the third digestion order) for executing the suspension change (in the sub-sub-control unit SS). Command is transmitted), and the flow shifts to step 3084. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3078, the process shifts to step 3084.

Next, in step 3084, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the first main game reservation number and the second main game reservation number (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and 2250, a hold display based on the hold display mode determined in step 2114 is set (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2300). Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of the post-change hold display mode and the command transmission mode related to the hold display position. As shown in the figure, after change according to the type of the hold change effect command (command to the sub-sub side), The hold display mode is determined. Also,
The command related to the pending change position (command to the sub-sub side) includes the information indicating the change suggestion display, the first digestion order to the fourth digestion order. Here, the features of the command related to the hold change effect in the first modification example from the second embodiment will be described in detail. As for the hold display mode after change, (1) In the case of executing a huge hold look-ahead effect, If the commands related to the hold split look-ahead effect, skewering hold look-ahead effect, and the hold simultaneous change effect are set and transmitted, it is determined to be out of the range (because the huge hold look-ahead effect is not executed simultaneously with other look-ahead effects), (2) Since the skewering hold prefetching effect is not executed for the fourth digestion order hold, when a command related to the fourth digestion order is set and transmitted, it is determined that the command is out of the range. (3) The sub-sub-controller SS does not execute the process when a command out of the range is received (ignores the command out of the range). (For example, changing from “white” to “red”) (or the change suggestion display) is used to initialize (change the display mode to “white”). It is configured. Here, the above-mentioned "out of range" will be described in detail.For example, during execution of a giant hold look-ahead effect, the hold change effect command is configured not to be transmitted to the sub-sub side. When the hold change command related to the hold look-ahead effect is received, it is determined that the command is out of the range (ignore the command received on the sub-sub side, do not perform any processing even if the command is received), that is, in an irregular situation When the sub-sub side receives the transmitted command, and determines that the command is out of the range, the sub-sub side ignores the command (does not execute the processing related to the command). In addition, when the sub-sub side receives a command indicating that the order is the fourth digestion order as the hold change position command at the time of executing the skewering hold look-ahead effect, the trigger hold related to the skewer hold look-ahead effect causes the hold change when the trigger hold occurs. Therefore, it is determined that the command is out of the range. In addition, as a specific example of the execution of the set of commands related to the contents of the pending change effect and the execution of the pending change effect, for example, when the pending change effect is a huge pending look-ahead effect, and the pending change position is the second digestion order, If the second digestion order hold is a giant hold display mode, the hold change effect is a giant hold look-ahead effect, and if the hold change position is the change suggestion display, the change suggestion display is a huge preparation hold display mode. Becomes Note that, in the figure, the hold change effect of the first main game side is extracted, and the hold display position of the second main game side is different from the hold display position of the first main game side. I have.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the digestion hold content transmission process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 1) in FIG. 37 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. In this figure, since the processing is the same as the processing for transmitting the held content at the time of occurrence in FIG. 59, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second variation 1) in FIG. 57 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main side, issues a specific game start command (from the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortened game state to the probability change game state and It is determined whether or not information indicating that the game has shifted to the time-saving game state) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2653, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (80) in a stay stage management counter (a counter for determining the current stay stage). Next, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the specific game execution flag (in the present example, in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state) in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. ON flag). Next, in step 2655, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “normal probable change stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2662.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and sends a special game winning command (information indicating that the special game has been won) from the main side. It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (clears to zero) the stay stage management counter. Next, in step 2659, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game execution flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the after-specific-game counter (a counter for measuring the number of times the main game symbol has fluctuated since the timing at which the specific game has ended after the elapse of the number of times the main game symbol fluctuates). Reset (clear to zero). Next, in step 2661, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2662. Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 2656, the process shifts to step 2662.

  Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 2662, in step 2663, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. If Yes in step 2663, in step 2664 the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the stay stage management counter. Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 2666, in step 2668 the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2669, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined value (20) in the after-specific-game counter, and proceeds to step 2670. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2663 or step 2666, the processing shifts to step 2670.

Next, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter, and the counter value falls within the range of the partition 3 (when the value of “40 ≧ the stay stage management counter value ≧ 21”, the partition is performed). 3). In the case of Yes in step 2670, in step 2671, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter, and the counter value is a break switching value (a stay stage management counter value in which a new stage break is switched, In this example, “60”, “40”, and “20” are determined. If the stay stage counter value is “40”, the result of step 2670 is “No”, and thus the processing of step 2671 is not executed. In the case of Yes in step 2671, in step 2672 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold scheduled to be consumed at the next break and scheduled to be a big hit ( For example, when the stay stage management counter value is “60”, and the hold in the third digestion order is a trigger hold that is a big hit, the stay stage of the break 2 is “special probability change stage”. Therefore, the result is No). In the case of Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “probable change stage” as the staying stage, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second change 1)}. Also, in the case of No in step 2671, the flow shifts to step 2684 to set “probable change stage” as the stay stage. If No in step 2670 or step 2672, in step 2676, the background effect display control unit SM23 determines that the stay stage is “special probable change stage (if the reach change is executed, the change may be a big hit. Is determined), and the flow shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 3200 (second variation 1)}. As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, the stay stage includes the “probable change stage” and the “special probable change stage”. The stay stage is configured to transition as follows: "Separation 1 = Probable change stage → Separator 2 = Probable change stage → Break 3 = Special probable change stage → Break 4 = Probable change stage". Also, when the stay stage management counter value is “60” or “20”, which is the delimiter switching value, the “probable change stage” is originally set as the stay stage. When there is a hold, a "special probable change stage" is set as the stay stage (after that, a reach effect is executed by a symbol change related to the trigger hold and a big hit is made). Although not shown, the “probable change stage” and the “special probable change stage” are configured such that they can be recognized as different stages from the viewpoint of the player (the appearance is greatly different).

  Also, in the case of No in step 2662, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific game end flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2678, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts (decrements) 1 from the counter value of the after-specific-game counter. Next, in step 2682, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the post-specific-game counter and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 2682, in step 2684 the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game end flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2686. On the other hand, if No in step 2682, the process moves to step 2686. Next, in step 2686, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the staying stage as the “stage after the end of the probable change (when the probability-variation game state ends due to the elapse of the number of changes in the main game symbol, a predetermined number of times from the end timing). A period until the game symbol finishes changing is set to "stay at a stay stage different from the" normal stage ")", and the flow shifts to the next process {the process of step 3200 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2678, in step 2688 the background effect display control unit SM23 sets “normal stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process {the process in step 3200 (second variation 1)}. .

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a stay stage determination table. The detailed description of the table has been omitted since it has been described above. As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, there are two types of stay stages that can stay in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and can stay in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state. There are two types of stay stages.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the initialization command transmission determination process according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second variation 1) in FIG. 57 in the first modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the layout reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the prefetch-related information temporary storage means SM26b, and determines whether or not a trigger hold related to skewering hold prefetch has newly occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3202, the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3202, in step 3203, the wiring diagram pending information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the big hit symbol has been newly stopped. If Yes in step 3203, the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3203, in step 3204, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is in the current time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the storage plan holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a second main game-side holding has newly occurred. . If Yes in step 3206, the process moves to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3208, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the second main game side has a hold. The determination is made (if No in this processing, the second main game hold is not newly generated, but the second main game hold is already present). In the case of Yes in step 3208, in step 3210, the storage plan holding information display control means SM22 refers to the prefetching related information temporary storage means SM26b, and determines whether the prefetching effect of the first main game side has been executed. I do. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3211, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 refers to the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether it is the timing of occurrence of the storage or the timing of the exhaustion of the storage. If Yes in step 3211, the process moves to step 3212. In the process of step 3211, it may be determined whether it is the timing of the occurrence of the reservation or only the timing of the exhaustion of the reservation.

  Next, in step 3212, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 sets "no change in suspension" as the suspension display mode of the first main game side (the command for initializing the suspension display mode is a sub-sub-control command). The command is transmitted to the unit SS). Next, in step 3214, the schematic diagram reservation information display control means SM22 sets the number of reservations on the first main game side (a command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the next processing (step 2300) Processing). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3204, step 3208, step 3210 or step 3211, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2300). As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, when the skewering hold prefetching effect is executed as the prefetching effect, the prefetching effect is “white” in which the hold display mode is the initial display mode at the start of the prefetching. Since it is configured to change to the skewering hold display mode during the execution of the pre-reading effect, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the command is related to the hold display mode of the first main game side. "No change in hold" is set (a command for initializing the above-described hold display mode is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS). As described above, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, (1) the occurrence of the trigger hold related to the skewing hold prefetching effect, which is the look-ahead effect in which the holding change can be executed at a timing later than the trigger holding occurrence Timing, (2) big hit start timing, (3) timing when the second main game hold occurs in the non-time shortened game state, (4) non-time shortened game state and the second main game hold does not exist and the (1) The hold display mode is initialized at the timing when the hold has occurred or the hold has been exhausted in a situation where the pre-reading effect has not been executed on the main game side (the initialization command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS) In addition, as the initialization command, a command related to the hold display mode of “no change in hold” and a command related to the number of holds on the first main game side are set. Further, in Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment, initialization is performed when a trigger hold related to a skewering hold look-ahead effect that is a hold look-ahead effect in which the hold display mode does not change when a trigger hold occurs. On the other hand, when a trigger hold related to a look-ahead effect such as a giant hold look-ahead effect that is a hold look-ahead effect in which a hold display mode changes when a trigger hold occurs, an initialization command is not set. (When the trigger hold related to the skewering hold prefetching effect occurs, the hold display mode is all “white”.) The transmission condition of the initialization command is not limited to this, and for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, , 2R, and a jackpot symbol pertaining to a jackpot that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot. The initialization command may not be transmitted at the time of stop (for example, the initialization command is transmitted at the time of stopping a big hit design related to a big hit of 4R or more or a big hit capable of substantially acquiring a game ball), When a hit is provided, the initialization command may not be transmitted when the small hit symbol is stopped, and in such a case, (1) the non-time (2) The initialization command described above is applied only in a specific game state, such as when a big hit symbol related to a big hit without a payout in a shortened game state is stopped, or when a small hit symbol is stopped in a non-time shortened game state. The initialization command is transmitted even when the condition for not transmitting is satisfied, but the sub-sub-controller SS ignores the command even if it is received (out of range). Is also good. With this configuration, for example, when a 2R jackpot is executed, the hold display mode immediately before the jackpot is the same as the hold display mode immediately after the end of the jackpot, but the 15R jackpot is not When executed, the hold display mode immediately before the jackpot is different from the hold display mode immediately after the end of the jackpot.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification example from the second embodiment, in the gaming machine having specifications such that the probability-variable gaming state can be ended by the number of times the main gaming symbol varies, the probability variation When the game state is the game state and the time reduction game state, the state is shifted to the limited frequency state, and the stay stage and the limited frequency table to be referred to are switched every time the predetermined number of main game symbols change. In addition to such a configuration, when the limited frequency table 1 is referred to, the jackpot expectation at the time of the reach change is about 50%, and when the limited frequency table 2 is referred to, the jackpot is expected to be the big hit at the time of the reach change. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the specific game (probability changing game state and time shortening game state) without getting bored. Also, when executing a giant hold look-ahead effect that cannot be executed in duplicate with other look-ahead effects, the commands related to other look-ahead effects are determined to be out of range. For example, a command to the sub-sub-control unit relating to the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode suitable for the game property, for example, the hold of the fourth digestion order is out of range because the hold change is not performed because the hold change is not executed. By setting the content and the command transmission mode, the command content and the command transmission mode more suitable for the specifications of the gaming machine can be achieved.

(Modification Example 2 from Second Embodiment)
Here, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, if the second main game hold occurs during the execution of the hold look-ahead effect on the first main game side, it is determined that the situation is irregular, and Although the processing related to the pending prefetch effect on the first main game side is all cleared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process to be executed can be different depending on the type of the prefetch effect. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the points different from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the first main game prize winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 37 in a second modification example of the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2186 (second variation 2), that is, after resetting (clearing to zero) the pending continuation counter SM22c in step 2180 (second), step 2186 (second variation 2). In), the holding prefetch giant effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the flag area of the prefetching related information temporary storage means SM26b and determines whether or not the huge holding prefetch execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2186 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2182 (second) to initialize the process related to the prefetch effect, and in the case of No, the next process (process of step 2112) Move to

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification example from the second embodiment, even if the second main game hold occurs during execution, a giant hold that is a look-ahead effect that does not hinder the effect. At the time of executing the look-ahead effect, the giant hold look-ahead effect is continuously displayed even if the second main game hold occurs, while the second main game hold is performed at the time of executing the look-ahead effect of the first main game side other than the giant hold look-ahead effect. Occurs, it is determined that the situation is irregular, and the processing related to the pending look-ahead effect on the first main game side during execution is configured to be clear, so that the second main game hold occurs. Also in this case, it is possible to execute a process according to the type of the prefetching effect being executed.

It should be noted that the second main game hold occurs during execution of a hold change look-ahead effect (for example, a huge hold look-ahead effect), which is a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display mode, which is configured in the same manner as the second modification from the second embodiment. Even so, the execution of the hold change look-ahead effect continues (the hold display mode after the hold change is maintained), and the second main game hold occurs during the execution of the background change look-ahead effect that is the look-ahead effect that changes the background effect. In such a case, the processing related to the background change prefetching effect may be cleared (the pending change prefetching effect and the background change prefetching effect are the prefetching effect on the first main game side). Similarly, when the second main game hold occurs during the execution of the hold change look-ahead effect that is the look-ahead effect that changes the hold display mode, the process related to the hold change look-ahead effect is cleared, and the background effect is changed. When the second main game suspension occurs during the execution of the background change prefetching effect, which is the prefetching effect, the execution of the background change prefetching effect may be continued.

  Note that the supplementary supplementary information (also referred to as supplementary information or supplementary image) in the present example corresponds to the effect display corresponding to the suspension display displayed near the suspension display and the suspension display overlapping the suspension display. Effect display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the hold display (for example, “heat” is displayed in the hold display), and the change suggestion display displayed near the change suggestion display. The corresponding effect display, the effect display corresponding to the change suggestion display overlapped with the change suggestion display, and the effect display corresponding to the change suggestion display displayed in the change suggestion display (for example, (Displayed as "heat" in the fluctuation suggestion display).

  Note that the hold display and the supplementary supplementary information in this example can be changed (attached) together with an action (holding pre-reading effect, etc.) in both cases (1). In such a case, the type of action that can be executed may be configured to be different between the change and the incidental.), (2) Difference between the pending change action and the pending incidental information incidental action (3) The pending change action and / or the pending supplementary information accompanying action may fail (no pending change, no pending supplementary information is attached), but the action may be executed again after the failure. (4) In the case where a plurality of actions (hold change action or hold accompanying information accompanying action) are executed by one or more symbol changes, the plurality of actions are performed. The actions may be different actions or the same action, respectively. (5) A plurality of actions (hold change action or hold accompanying information accompanying action) are performed by one or more symbol changes. When the action is executed, the jackpot expectation and / or action success expectation 当 該 of the plurality of actions, or the degree of change when the action is successful (for example, change from “white” to “blue” or “white” Changes from "" to "red" or the degree of rank-up such as one-step-up or two-step-up)｝ may be different or the same (the action whose probability of action failure is also executed) May be different depending on the type). In addition, in one symbol change, (1) rank up by a plurality of stages by one action (“white”, “blue”, and “red” in the order from the one with the highest hit expectation degree to “white”) → 2 ranks up with “red”), (2) 1 rank up by one action, (3) multiple ranks up by multiple actions (for example, total by 2 actions) (2 ranks up), (4) The configuration of (1) or (2) is applied to the suspended display, and the configurations of (1) to (3) are applied to the change suggestion display. (5) For the change suggestion display, the above-described configuration (1) to (3) can be executed a plurality of times. For example, (2) is executed after (1), and (1) is executed after (1). ) May be executed.

Further, as exemplified in this example, the main game symbol is configured so that the fluctuation time determined by the number of suspensions at the time of determining the fluctuation time can be different. The variation time of the game symbol is 3 seconds (the symbol variation is referred to as symbol variation A), and the variation time of the main game symbol is 11 seconds when the number of holds at the time of determining the variation time is 1 (the symbol variation is symbol variation B). (1) An action (holding change action or action with accompanying supplementary information) can be executed by the symbol variation A and the symbol variation B, but the action (holding) is performed by the symbol variation A and the symbol variation B. The mode of the change action or the holding supplementary information accompanying action is different (action A in the case of the symbol variation A, action B in the case of the symbol variation B), (2) the symbol variation B is being executed, and the remaining Fluctuation time 3 seconds Pending change upon but the action A is not executed even if the trigger hold has occurred the trigger hold occurs when a top is feasible, it may be configured. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the next change is started, so that a hold change (or a change in the change suggestion display mode) can be executed thereafter.

(Example of change of pending look-ahead effect)
Regarding the look-ahead effect that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, various effect modes other than the above-described configurations can be applied. Therefore, a modification example of the effect of the look-ahead effect, which is not described above, will be described in detail below. In addition, in the following examples, all the holdings not specified are all holdings of the first main game side (the holdings displayed at the upper left of the effect display device SG), and the order of digestion order The hold display mode and the like are merely examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

(Example of change of pending look-ahead effect 1)
First, FIG. 64 is a first example of a change of the reservation look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Then, with the same change, penguin as the first hold change effect (Hold change expectation as the first hold change effect (If the hold change expectation is low, there may be no hold change even if an action is taken, or if there is no hold change) And / or the average value of the big hit expectation of the hold display mode after the change is relatively low. In this example, “penguin”) appears. Next, with the same fluctuation, “Penguin” is weakly rendered as the second pending change effect (the pending change expectation (
If the pending change expectation degree is low, the pending change may not occur even if an action is taken, or the pending change may be relatively large) and / or the average value of the big hit expectation of the pending display mode after the change Is a relatively low pending change effect, and in this example, star small) is executed. Next, the suspension display (the suspension display in the third digestion order) that has hit the weak effect changes from “white” to “blue”. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change is determined depending on the action. Specifically, when an action in which a penguin appears occurs, the degree of expectation of the pending change is relatively low, and when an action in which a sheep appears occurs, the pending change becomes deterministic, or When the action that appears (small) occurs, the degree of expectation of the pending change is relatively low, and when the action that appears (star) occurs, the pending change is definitely determined, etc. May be configured.

  Next, in the second from the top, after “Penguin” appears as the first pending change effect, “Penguin” is strongly produced as the second pending change effect with the same change (the pending change as the second pending change effect). This is a hold change effect in which the average value of the degree of expectation and / or the big hit expectation of the hold display mode after the change is relatively high. In this example, star size is executed. Next, the hold display (the third hold order in the digestion order) that collides with the strong effect changes from “white” to “green”.

  Next, in the third from the top, the number of reservations is three, and in a state where the decorative design is fluctuating, the sheep as the first reservation change effect (the sheep change expectation degree as the first reservation change effect and And / or a hold change effect in which the average value of the big hit expectation in the hold display mode after the change is relatively high, and in this example, “sheep”) appears. Next, at the same fluctuation, the “sheep” is a weak effect as the second hold change effect (the average value of the hold change expectation degree and / or the big hit expectation degree of the hold display mode after the change is relative as the second hold change effect). In this example, star change is performed. Next, the hold display (the third hold order in the digestion order) that has hit the weak effect changes from “white” to “yellow”.

  Next, at the bottom, after "sheep" appears as the first pending change effect, "sheep" is strongly produced as the second pending change effect with the same change (the expected degree of pending change as the second pending change effect) And / or a hold change effect in which the average value of the big hit expectation of the hold display mode after the change is relatively high, and in this example, star size is executed. Next, the suspension display (the suspension display in the third digestion order) that collides with the strong effect changes from “white” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 64, two pending change effects, that is, the first pending change effect and the second pending change effect are provided as the pending change effects, and the type of the pending change effect (or a combination of the types) is a big hit. It is configured such that the degree of expectation and / or the tendency of the pending change content can be different. In addition, the big hit expectation degree concerning the hold display mode is “red”> “green”> “yellow”> “blue” in descending order. In the case of an effect of an effect mode in which an object collides toward the on-hold display as in the second on-hold change effect as shown in the figure, depending on the display position of the on-hold trigger (the order of digestion of the on-hold trigger), The trajectory of the object is different (the effect pattern is different). Further, a success pattern and a failure pattern may be provided in the first hold change effect and the second hold change effect. When the first hold change effect is successful, the second hold change effect is executed, and the second hold change effect is successful. Then, it may be configured to execute the pending change. In this example, the hold change effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The change suggestion display change effect (the effect in which the change suggestion display mode changes) includes the first change suggestion display change effect and the first change suggestion change effect. (2) The change suggestion display effect may be provided, and the jackpot expectation degree and / or the tendency of the pending change content may be different depending on the type of the change suggestion display change effect.

(Pending prefetching effect change example 2)
Next, FIG. 65 is a second example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, a trigger hold occurs during the change of the decorative symbol, the fourth digestion order hold is a trigger hold, and the trigger hold hold display mode is a treasure chest hold ( All reservations are the first main game suspension). After one change thereafter, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the lost symbol stops as a symbol for stopping the symbol change. Then, after two changes, that is, at the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode becomes the “treasure box” display, and an effect of opening the “treasure box” display is executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a display indicating a battle effect (reach effect) appears from the open “treasure box” display, and then the reach effect is executed.

  Next, at the bottom, a trigger hold occurs during the change of the decorative symbol, the fourth digestion order hold is a trigger hold, and the trigger hold hold display mode is a treasure chest hold. After one change from the state, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the big hit symbol stops as a symbol for stopping the symbol change. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the trigger hold display mode changes from “treasure box” to “white” when the big hit symbol stops (information about trigger hold is also deleted).

As described above, in FIG. 65, the treasure chest hold is configured to be displayed as the trigger hold display mode when the hold change effect is executed. Until the process is started, it is configured that the display mode as the change suggestion display mode is kept secret. In other words, the configuration is such that the big hit expectation degree of the symbol change related to the trigger hold is kept secret until the trigger change symbol change is started. Also, the treasure chest hold may be configured to be opened even before the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, but even in such a case, the “treasure box” is displayed by the symbol change related to the trigger hold. It is preferable that the opening ratio is reduced before the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, as compared with the opening ratio. In addition to opening the “treasure box” display, the color of the “treasure box” display may be changed, or the “treasure box” display may be moved in a rattling manner. If the possibility of appearing is high (there is also a case where nothing comes out), or if the hold displayed in the “treasure box” display is exhausted, the change suggestion display mode has a high jackpot expectation. You may comprise so that it may be easy. Although not shown in the figure, a hold display other than the trigger hold during the execution of the pre-reading effect may be configured to indicate the content of the notice effect after the “treasure box” display is opened (for example, a big hit). It is possible to fuel the execution of a highly-announced notice effect). In addition, as shown in the figure, when a big hit is started or a game state is shifted, all the hold display modes including the trigger hold are displayed in “white” (the hold state when the pre-reading effect is not executed). Display mode) (the execution of the look-ahead effect is also terminated). In addition, when the second main game hold occurs, in the symbol change related to the second main game hold, a look-ahead effect such as a change in the hold is not executed. As the types of the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode, there are a first type mode that is a display mode that can be changed during hold display and a second type mode that is a display mode that does not change during hold display. When provided, the first type mode includes both the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode. For example, the display of “red” in the hold display and the display of “red” in the change suggestion display are slightly different. May be regarded as the same even if there is a difference in the shape (difference in size or the like).

(Pending prefetching effect change example 3)
Next, FIG. 66 is a third example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a sword (small) piercing effect is applied to the hold display in the second digestion order as a look-ahead effect (a hold change expectation degree as a hold change effect and / or a jackpot expectation degree of the hold display mode after the change) Is held, and the effect is successful, and a sword (small) is stabbed in the hold display mode (stabs as the supplementary supplementary information). Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the hold stabbed by the sword changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the second from the top, a sword (small) stab effect (hold change expectation degree and / or a hold display mode after change as a hold change effect) with respect to the hold display in the second digestion order as a look-ahead effect , A hold change effect in which the average value of the big hit expectation is relatively low is executed, the effect fails, and the sword (small) does not stick into the hold display mode. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode does not change because the sword did not pierce.

  Next, in the third row from the top, a sword (large) stab effect (hold change expectation degree and / or a hold display mode after change as a hold change effect) with respect to the hold display in the second digestion order as a prefetch effect Is executed, and the effect is successful, and a sword (large) is stabbed in the hold display mode (stabs as the supplementary supplementary information). Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the hold that the sword stabbed changes from “white” to “red”.

  Next, in the lowermost stage, a sword (large) stab effect (hold change expectation degree and / or a big hit of the hold display mode after the change as the hold change effect) is performed for the hold display in the second digestion order as the look-ahead effect. A hold change effect in which the average value of the expectation is relatively high is executed, the effect fails, and the sword (large) does not stick into the hold display mode. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the hold display mode does not change because the sword did not pierce, but an effect that informs the player that the sword (large) effect is almost definite that the sword will succeed (pierce). Therefore, in the case of failure (no piercing), special effect treatment (so-called premiere effect) is performed, and it becomes definitive that the symbol change related to the trigger hold becomes a big hit. With this configuration, even if the sword (large) production in which the jackpot expectation degree becomes the high expectation degree fails, it is determinative that the symbol change related to the trigger hold at the time of the failure becomes a loss change. Can be configured not to be.

As described above, in FIG. 66, two pending change effects of the sword (small) and the sword (large) are provided, and the probability that the sword (large) succeeds in the effect is greater than the sword (small) ( The probability of piercing) is high, and the probability of a big hit when the effect is successful (when piercing) is high. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sword (large) is more likely to succeed in the effect than the sword (small). May be higher than the sword (large), etc., or the sword (large) may have a higher probability of a big hit than the sword (small). (Small) is higher than sword (large), and may be equal. Also, the sword (large) is less likely to succeed than the sword (small), but if successful, the sword (large) has a higher jackpot expectation than the sword (small). (It is easy to change to a display mode). In other words, the sword (small) is easier to succeed than the sword (large), but if successful, the sword (small) has a lower jackpot expectation than the sword (large) (the jackpot expectation is lower) (It is easy to change to the hold display mode).

(Pending prefetching effect change example 4)
Next, FIG. 67 is a pending prefetch effect change example 4. First, in the top row, the number of holds is three, and a hold frame (a display surrounding four hold displays, and the hold frame is configured to be actionable) is displayed in a normal display mode. Have been. Thereafter, with the same change, the reserved frame action (small) is executed (the reserved frame shines conservatively). Thereafter, with the same change, the third digestion order reservation changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the second from the top, the number of holds is three, and the hold frame (a display surrounding four hold displays, and the hold frame is configured to be actionable) is in a normal display mode. Is displayed in. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a reserved frame action (large) is executed (the reserved frame glows violently). Thereafter, with the same change, the third digestion order reservation changes from “white” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 67, two holding change effects, that is, the holding frame action (small) and the holding frame action (large), are provided. It is configured so that it is deterministic that the pending change is executed. Further, it is configured such that the hold display mode having a high jackpot expectation is more easily changed when the hold frame action (large) is executed than when the hold frame action (small) is executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a case may be provided in which a hold does not change even if a hold frame action is executed (a so-called gassing effect). Further, when the hold frame action is executed, the change suggestion display mode may be changed. In addition, regarding the hold frame action, when the action is executed, in a symbol change after the execution of the action, the symbol suggests a possibility of a change in the hold display mode remaining in the symbol change. Good (a change may be made deterministic).

(Pending prefetching effect change example 5)
Next, FIG. 68 is a fifth example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, at the top, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, with the same change, two options of “sheep” and “penguin” are displayed as the supplementary information (preliminary production related to the prefetching production displayed near the reservation display). Thereafter, with the same change, “sheep” is selected from the options of the supplementary supplementary information, and the “sheep” executes an action on the effect display device SG. The expectation of the jackpot of the look-ahead effect is relatively low.

  Next, in the second from the top, under the situation where the number of holds is three, “sheep”, “penguin”, and “chick” are used as the supplementary supplementary information (preliminary production related to the look-ahead production displayed near the hold display). Are displayed. Thereafter, with the same change, “Penguin” is selected from the options of the supplementary supplementary information, and the “Penguin” executes an action on the effect display device SG. The jackpot expectation of the look-ahead effect is relatively high.

Next, at the bottom, in a situation where the number of holds is three, one option of only "sheep" is displayed as the supplementary supplementary information (a notice effect related to the prefetching effect displayed near the hold display). Thereafter, with the same change, “sheep” is selected from the options of the supplementary supplementary information, and the “sheep” executes an action on the effect display device SG. Here, the prefetching effect to be selected is basically an effect of selecting from a plurality of options. Therefore, when only one selection is made, it is definitive that the premier effect will be a big hit if only one is selected. It is configured to be.

  As described above, in FIG. 68, when there are a plurality of options displayed as the supplementary supplementary information, the larger the number of options, the higher the jackpot expectation, and when only one option is displayed, It is configured so that the symbol change becomes a big hit. Alternatively, all of the options may be performed, for example, a sheep is configured to indicate execution of pseudo continuous fluctuation, a penguin is indicated to perform super reach, and a chick is to indicate execution of other notice (step-up notice, etc.). Alternatively, an effect corresponding to each option may be executed by the symbol variation as much as each option is executed.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 6)
Next, FIG. 69 is a sixth example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same change, the change of the decorative symbol stops, and the stop symbol of the change and the special symbol (the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that triggers execution of the hold change effect) stop. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the display mode of the third digestion order suspension changes from “white” to “blue”, triggered by the stop of the special symbol.

  As described above, in FIG. 69, the hold change effect is executed by stopping (fixed stop display or temporary stop display) the special symbol which is the stop symbol for executing the hold change effect as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It will be. Note that the execution timing of the hold change effect may be performed from the stop timing of the special symbol to the start timing of the next change. In addition, as a configuration example in which a special symbol is stopped, a change in hold is executed, for example, an effect content in which a special symbol does not stop before trigger hold occurs as an effect content related to a certain symbol change is determined. In such a case, the effect contents may be replaced with the effect contents in which the special symbol stops due to the occurrence of the trigger hold. Note that the replacement condition in such a case is that the symbol variation currently being executed is not a specific symbol variation (for example, a symbol variation that causes a big hit) and a predetermined timing (for example, a timing one second before the stop of the variation). May be replaced when the previous timing is reached.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 7)
Next, FIG. 70 is a seventh example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of reservations is three, and the decorative design is fluctuating. After that, at the same change, “Penguin” is set as the change suggestion display effect as the change suggestion change effect (the effect that the change suggestion change is not pending and the effect that the change suggestion change changes is the change suggestion display change effect). The action of skipping the “blue” ball (display mode similar to the hold display) is executed. Thereafter, with the same change, the display mode of the change suggestion display in which the “blue” ball collides changes from “white” to “blue”. After that, at the same change, an action of causing the “sheep” to fly a “red” ball (display mode similar to the hold display) toward the change suggestion display is executed as the change suggestion display change effect. Thereafter, with the same change, the display mode of the change suggestion display in which the “red” ball collides changes from “blue” to “red”.

In this manner, in FIG. 70, a plurality of holding change effects and holding changes can be executed in one symbol change period. It should be noted that there may be a case where the hold change effect is not executed even when the hold change effect is executed. In such a case, for example, a structure is set such that the more the number of executions of the hold change effect, the easier the hold change is made. May be. Specifically, when three hold change effects are performed in one symbol change, the hold change expectation degree (or hold time) of the third hold change effect is higher than that of the first hold change effect. The big hit expectation of the suspended display mode after the change) may be increased.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 8)
Next, FIG. 71 is an example 8 of a change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, in the uppermost row, the number of holds is three, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold, and the trigger hold display mode is rotation hold (the hold display is rotated). It has become. Here, the rotation hold is (1) a hold with a relatively low jackpot expectation (a hold with a lower jackpot expectation than “blue” unless the hold is changed further from here), and (2) other jackpot expectations. This is a hold display mode having a higher hold change probability than the hold of the display mode, in other words, a hold suggesting a possibility of changing to a hold with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the “blue” hold. After two fluctuations (two new holds have occurred), a strong background effect as a background effect (a big hit expectation due to the execution of the background effect executed when the trigger hold has occurred) A background effect with a relatively high degree) is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold remains the rotation hold. After one change, the execution of the strong background effect is maintained, and in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode becomes the rotation display (the pattern change related to the trigger hold remains the trigger hold display mode as the rotation display). Was started).

  Next, in the second from the top, after two fluctuations in the symbol fluctuation in which the rotation hold has occurred (two new holds have occurred), a strong background effect is executed as a background effect, and the trigger hold display mode is changed. It changes from rotation hold to red hold. After one change, the execution of the strong background effect is maintained, and in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode becomes “red” (the trigger hold is displayed while the trigger hold display mode is “red”) Because the symbol fluctuation related to has been started).

  Next, in the third from the top, after two fluctuations in the symbol fluctuation in which the rotation hold has occurred (two new holds have occurred), the background effect is a weak background effect (the trigger hold has occurred. Of the background effects executed as a trigger, a background effect having a relatively low degree of expectation of a big hit by being executed is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold remains the rotation hold. After one change, the execution of the weak background effect is maintained, and in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode becomes the rotation display (the symbol change related to the trigger hold remains the trigger hold display mode as the rotation display). Was started).

  Next, in the lowermost stage, after two fluctuations in the symbol fluctuation in which the rotation hold has occurred (two new holds have occurred), a weak background effect (as triggered by the occurrence of the trigger hold) as the background effect Of the background effects to be executed, a background effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation due to execution is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold changes from the rotation hold to the blue hold. After one change, the execution of the weak background effect is maintained, and the change suggestion display mode becomes “blue” in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (the trigger hold is held while the trigger hold display mode is displayed in “blue”) Since the symbol fluctuation according to has been started).

As described above, in FIG. 71, as the background effect, a weak background effect and a strong background effect having a higher jackpot expectation degree than the weak background effect and / or a higher probability of the rotation change being changed on hold are configured to be executable. . As the jackpot expectation, from the highest order, “the strong background effect is executed and the rotation hold does not change on hold”> The strong background effect is executed and the rotation change changes on hold> The weak background effect is executed and the rotation change changes on hold If the strong background effect is executed and the rotation change does not change, the rotation change of the strong background effect may change. Since this is an effect that informs the player that it is almost determinate, if the change related to the trigger hold is started while the rotation is held, the special effect is treated (so-called premium effect), and the symbol change related to the trigger hold is performed. Will be a big hit. In addition, when the rotation hold exists, the rotation hold changes based on whether or not a look-ahead effect other than the change of the hold (the background effect illustrated in this example, the supplementary information on the hold, etc.) is being executed. The ratios are configured to be different. In addition, when the rotation hold is displayed, as a ratio of which of the configurations shown in the drawing becomes, in order of the selection rate, “third from the top → fourth from the top or second from the top → top” It is preferable that it is "the first one".

(Previous prefetching effect change example 9)
Next, FIG. 72 is a ninth example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72 has a sub input button SB, which is a member capable of executing an effect by a player's operation. First, in the upper row, the number of holds is three, the hold of the third digestion order is a trigger hold, and the display mode of the trigger hold is a rotation hold (the hold display is rotated and displayed). Has become. Thereafter, with the same change, the long press of the sub input button SB is executed, and the display mode of the trigger hold changes from the rotation hold to the “red” hold. Thereafter, after three changes, the change is related to the trigger hold, the change suggestion display mode is displayed in “red”, and the reach effect is executed.

  Next, in the lower stage, the sub-input button SB is not operated due to the symbol fluctuation in which the rotation suspension has occurred, and the display mode of the trigger suspension is maintained as the rotation suspension. After that, the sub input button SB is not operated during the two fluctuations, but the hold display state of the trigger hold is changed to the rotation hold or the “red” hold by executing the hold change effect. After one change, the change suggestion display mode becomes “red” due to the change related to the trigger hold, and the reach effect is executed.

  In this manner, in FIG. 72, the rotation hold is changed to “red” hold in both the upper row and the lower row, but a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB by the player (in this example, long press). ), The display of the result of the pending change may be accelerated. Note that, when the hold change is not scheduled to be executed (when the change related to the trigger hold is to be started while the rotation is held), the hold change is executed even if a predetermined operation of the sub input button SB is executed. It is configured not to be.

(Reservation look-ahead effect change example 10)
Next, FIG. 73 is a tenth example of the change of the reserved look-ahead effect. First, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, with the same change, an action of “Penguin” emitting a flame is performed for all the hold displays as a hold change effect. After that, with the same change, the hold display mode of the first digestion order changes from "white" to "blue", and the hold display mode of the third digestion order changes from "white" to "red" I do.

  As described above, FIG. 73 is configured such that the hold display mode of a plurality of holds can be changed by executing one hold change effect (hold change action). It should be noted that there is no problem even if the display position of the changing hold, the changing display mode, and the changing number of the hold are changed. Further, as a configuration in which the hold display mode of a plurality of holds can be changed by executing one hold change effect (hold change action), for example, a plurality of (for example, two) holds are triggered by the occurrence of a trigger hold. While the display mode is changed, a specific background effect (for example, a zone in which the change in the hold mode frequently occurs) is performed over a plurality of changes (two symbol changes since the two hold display modes are changed) corresponding to the change in the hold display mode. The design may be configured such that the hold display mode is changed again during the execution of the background effect (the design change for a specific background effect may be extended by the number of times the hold display mode has changed again). In addition, action 1 and action 2 (for example, an action in which a penguin appears and a frame change action) may occur at the same time, and the simultaneously displayed actions may rank up the hold display mode by two or more steps. Further, the present invention may be applied to not only the change suggestion display mode but also the hold display mode.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 11)
Next, FIG. 74 is a held prefetching effect change example 11. First, the decorative design fluctuates under the situation where the number of reservations is two, and the second digestion reservation is the trigger reservation. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the fluctuation of the decorative pattern becomes the reach fluctuation. After that, with the same change, the left stop symbol and the right stop symbol stop at the same "6" symbol as the reach change, and the middle stop symbol is a special symbol "change" as the stop symbol of the change of the decorative symbol. Stop at the symbol. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the stop change effect is executed with the stop of the “change” symbol, which is the special symbol, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 74, the prefetching effect and the holding change are performed when the reach change (reach effect) is executed, and as a result of the success or failure of the reach change (reach effect), the special symbol indicating the loss is stopped. Is configured to be executed. In addition, the look-ahead effect of this example is a symbol variation in which the reach variation and the stop of the special symbol were not scheduled to be executed until the trigger hold occurred (a symbol variation that was scheduled to stop the non-reach and lost symbol, for example, “ 6.8.4. "Is scheduled to be stopped), and the reach variation and the stop of the special symbol may be executed as described above, triggered by the occurrence of the trigger hold. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) the symbol variation for stopping the special symbol is a symbol variation before the occurrence of the trigger hold, and is not a symbol variation having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree such as super reach. (2) In the case where the loss occurs after the reach change and the case where the loss occurs after the non-reach change, the temporary stop time may be longer when the loss occurs after the reach change. In addition, regardless of the variation mode before the trigger hold occurs, the configuration may be such that the reach variation and the stop of the special symbol as described above can be executed.

(Reservation look-ahead effect change example 12)
Next, FIG. 75 is a hold look-ahead effect modification example 12. First, in the upper stage, under the situation where the number of holds is two, the hold in the second digestion order is the trigger hold. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display of the trigger hold causes an action, and a treasure chest display effect (an effect in which an action is executed from the hold display and a treasure box display appears) is executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a display of “red” suspension appears from the treasure box as the effect result of the treasure box effect. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the result of the treasure chest effect is “red” hold (because “red” hold has appeared from the treasure box), so that the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “red”. Note that an image (for example, an image of red paint) suggesting that the image may be changed to “red” may be made to appear instead of the “red” reserved image itself from the treasure box.

  Next, in the lower stage, the hold display of the trigger hold causes an action, and a treasure box display effect is executed. In the same fluctuation, the display of “ska” appears from the treasure box as the effect result of the treasure box effect. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the result of the treasure chest effect is “ska” hold (because “ska” has appeared from the treasure box), so that the trigger hold display mode remains “white”.

  In this manner, in FIG. 75, as the hold change effect, the hold display itself of the trigger hold causes an action (notification effect), and whether or not the hold is changed according to the result of the action from the trigger hold hold display and / or The hold display mode after the hold change is determined. Although the hold display itself of the trigger hold is configured to be able to execute the hold change by causing an action (announcement effect), the present invention is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode may be changed. . In addition, when the hold display itself of the trigger hold causes an action (announcement effect), and when the action is continuously executed over a plurality of changes, a change in hold or a change in the change suggestion display mode is performed. It may be configured as follows.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 13)
Next, FIG. 76 shows a pending look-ahead effect modification example 13. First, at the top, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, at timing 1 of the same change, as a change suggestion display change effect (an effect in which the change suggestion display mode can change), an effect in which a penguin emits a flame toward the change suggestion display is executed, and the change suggestion display is performed. The display mode changes from “white” to “blue”.

  Next, in the middle stage, the number of reservations is three. Thereafter, at timing 2, which is the same variation, and later than timing 1, the penguin moves toward the variation suggestion display as the variation suggestion display change effect (the effect in which the variation suggestion display mode can change). The effect of exhaling flame is performed, and the change suggestion display mode changes from “white” to “yellow”.

  Next, at the bottom, the number of reservations is three. After that, at the timing 3 which is the same fluctuation, is a timing after the timing 1 and is a timing after the timing 2, the change suggestion display change effect (the change suggestion display mode may change). As an effect, an effect in which the penguin emits flame toward the change suggestion display is executed, and the change suggestion display mode changes from “white” to “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 76, as the pending change effect, the change suggestion display change effect is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings (timing 1, timing 2, and timing 3) in one symbol change. The big hit expectation is “timing 3> timing 2> timing 1” in the descending order, that is, the bigger the bigger the expectation, the more the change suggestion display changes at the timing after one symbol change. It is configured to be. Further, the change suggestion display mode may be changed at two or more times of the plurality of times.

(Reservation look-ahead effect change example 14)
Next, FIG. 77 shows a pending look-ahead effect modification example 14. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. Thereafter, at the same change, a treasure chest discovery effect (a content of how many treasure boxes can be found, and the number of treasure boxes found in the effect is accumulated and displayed as supplementary information) is executed. You find three chests. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, when three treasure chests are found, three treasure chests are accumulated and displayed as the supplementary supplementary information as the supplementary supplementary information. After two fluctuations thereafter, a treasure chest disclosure effect, which is an effect of opening one by one the treasure box display accumulated and displayed as the supplementary supplementary information, is executed. Thereafter, with the same change, as a result of the treasure chest disclosure effect, “red” reservation is found in the treasure chest opened third (the effect result is first → ska, second → ska, 3) First → "red" pending). Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “red”.

  In this way, in FIG. 77, a plurality of treasure chests discovered in the treasure chest discovery effect can be displayed as the supplementary supplementary information. Until the treasure chest disclosure effect is executed, the contents (disclosure result) of the treasure chest display, which is the supplementary information, are kept secret. In addition, (1) there are a plurality of execution timings of the treasure chest discovery effect and / or the execution timing of the treasure box disclosure effect, and a ratio at which a hold display with a high jackpot expectation and / or a high jackpot expectation in the treasure box disclosure effect appears depending on the timing. (2) There are a plurality of types of treasure chest display and / or types of treasure chest display of the supplementary information that can be found in the treasure chest discovery effect, and depending on the type, a jackpot expectation and / or a jackpot expectation in the treasure chest disclosure effect. (3) There is a plurality of execution timings of the treasure chest finding effect, and the supplementary information is accumulated and displayed every time the treasure box finding effect is executed. May be. In addition to the pending changes (changes in the change suggestion display), suggestions as to whether or not to execute pseudo-continuous changes, suggestions for the occurrence of specific notices, and suggestions for the jackpot expectation (displays such as "Gekiatsu" and "Chance") are displayed from the treasure chest. It may be configured to appear.

(Previous prefetching effect change example 15)
Next, FIG. 78 is a pending prefetch effect change example 15. First, in the upper part, the number of reservations is 3, and the suspension in the third digestion order is the trigger suspension. Then, at the same change, the sub-input button A operation instruction effect (in this example, the sub-input button A and the sub-input button Button B and two sub input buttons, and an effect that prompts the player to operate sub input button A) is executed. Thereafter, with the same change, the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “blue” when the sub input button A is operated.

  Next, in the lower part, the number of reservations is three, and the reservation in the third digestion order is the trigger reservation. Thereafter, with the same variation, a sub-input button B operation instruction production as a sub-input button operation instruction production (in this example, two sub-input buttons A and B are provided as sub-input buttons) Then, an effect for prompting the player to operate the sub input button B) is executed. Thereafter, with the same change, the trigger hold display mode changes from “white” to “red” when the sub input button B is operated.

As described above, in FIG. 78, the sub input button operation instruction effect has a plurality of sub input button operation instruction effects of the sub input button A operation instruction effect and the sub input button B operation instruction effect. Is "sub input button B operation instruction effect> sub input button A operation instruction effect", that is, the big hit expectation differs depending on the executed sub input button operation instruction effect. In addition, the sub input button operation instruction effect may be provided with an effect mode (so-called gaseous effect) in which the hold change is not performed even if the player operates the sub input button, and in such a case, A configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence ratio of the gaseous effect is made different depending on the sub-input button operation instruction effect to be executed. Further, in the present example, the hold change is executed by the sub input button operation instruction effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change suggestion display mode may be changed. Although only the sub input button A is operated as a member to be operated, a plurality of hold change effects having different operation modes may be provided, for example, a single-shot press effect in which the sub input button A is pressed only once, A continuous hit effect in which the sub input button A is pressed a plurality of times has a higher hit expectation degree (or a higher hold change expectation degree) when the continuous hit effect is executed than when a single-shot effect is executed. , It is easy to change to a hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation).

(Previous Look-ahead Effect Change Example 16)
Next, FIG. 79 shows a pending look-ahead effect modification example 16. First, in the upper row, the number of reservations is 2, and the second digestion order is the trigger hold. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a reel effect in which two reel images appear (an effect that suggests the presence / absence of a hold change, unlike the fluctuation of the decoration symbol that indicates the result of the main game symbol or not) is executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the player operates the sub-input button, and the stop effect of the reel effect is changed to the left reel and the right reel stops changing. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the trigger-suspended display mode changes from "white" to "red" when the stop effect of the reel effect becomes "change" for the two reels. After two changes, that is, in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, “red” is displayed as the change suggestion display mode due to the hold display mode of the trigger hold being “red”. As a notice effect (a notice effect in which the change suggestion display mode causes an action), “chance” is displayed from the “red” display.

  Next, in the lower stage, a reel effect is executed, and thereafter, with the same fluctuation, when the player operates the sub input button, the stop effect of the reel effect is changed to the left reel as “change” and the right reel is changed to “×”. Stops. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the trigger-suspended display mode remains "white" when the stop effect of the reel effect does not become "change" for the two reels. In addition, since the suspension change was not executed, the change announcement effect is not executed.

In this manner, in FIG. 79, when the reel effect is executed, the reel is stopped by the player operating the sub input button, and the two reels are combined with “change” as a result of the effect of the reel effect. As a result, the pending change is executed, and the change notice effect is executed by executing the held change. When the player does not operate the sub input button, the reel effect is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the reel effect (the effect result is notified). The sub input button can be operated any number of times until the fluctuation time elapses (ends), and each reel stops each time the sub input button is operated. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which even if the user fails once, another challenge is possible. If the effect is successful, the sub input button cannot be operated. In addition, it is possible to configure “change” and “change” a plurality of times, and it is possible to expect a further change in hold by aligning again once after the change is made once once. (May be executed for the change suggestion display).

(Previous look-ahead effect change example 17)
Next, FIG. 80 shows a pending look-ahead effect modification example 17. First, the number of holds is 3, and the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a hold confidential effect (an effect in which all the hold displays are in a concealed state) is executed triggered by the occurrence of the trigger hold. After three changes, when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, the hold confidential effect ends, and “red” is displayed as the change suggestion display mode.

As described above, in FIG. 80, the hold confidential effect in which all the hold displays are in the confidential state triggered by the occurrence of the trigger hold is configured to be executable, and when the hold concealment effect is executed, Although it is definitive that the change suggestion display mode is displayed in a display mode other than the normal display mode of “white”, which display mode is selected (whether “blue” or “red”) ) Is configured to be kept confidential until the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started. With this configuration, during execution of the hold concealment effect, the player has changed the hold display of the trigger hold from “white” to a hold change, and the result is found in the change suggestion display mode related to the trigger hold. Then you will think. In addition, when the hold confidential effect is executed, an action may be generated, and it may not be possible to determine which of the hold display modes of the hold changed by the action. Further, the change of the hold may be indicated or notified by a sound (for example, if a sound such as “picone!” Is made, it is determined that the change has been made on hold and cannot be distinguished from the appearance of the image) instead of the action by the image. . Note that the above configuration may be applied to the change suggestion display, but in such a configuration, concealment is performed only until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change (timing before the change stop timing). It is preferable to display the change suggestion display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

(Previous Look-ahead Effect Change Example 18)
Next, FIG. 81 is an example of a change of the reserved look-ahead effect 18. First, in the upper row, the number of holds is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is “treasure box”. After one change, the symbol change is executed without causing a new hold. After two changes thereafter, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed without the occurrence of a new hold, and the change suggestion display mode of the symbol change related to the trigger hold is displayed in a “treasure box”.

  Next, in the lower part, the hold number is 3, the hold in the third digestion order is the trigger hold, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold is “treasure box”. Then, after one change, a new reservation occurs during the symbol change after the one change. Thereafter, after the same fluctuation, the trigger display of the trigger hold changes from “treasure box” to “red” when the new hold occurs. After two changes, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed, and the change suggestion display mode of the symbol change related to the trigger hold is displayed in “red”.

  As described above, in FIG. 81, the hold display mode of the trigger hold becomes “treasure box” when the trigger hold occurs. However, the “treasure box” hold is a hold display mode that conceals the jackpot expectation degree. At the time of the occurrence of the hold, the player can recognize that the trigger hold has occurred, but cannot recognize the expectation degree of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. In the trigger hold with the hold display mode of “treasure box”, when a new hold occurs after the trigger hold has occurred, the hold change effect is executed, and the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes from “treasure box”. It is configured to be.

(Example 19 of change of pending look-ahead effect)
Next, FIG. 82 is a modification example 19 of the held look-ahead effect. First, in the huge hold look-ahead effect at the top, the number of holds is three, and the third hold in the digestion order is the trigger hold related to the giant hold look-ahead effect, and the giant hold fueling effect (displayed during execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect) Acquisition additional information) is executed. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, the second main game side will cause a hold, but the execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect (and the giant hold fanning effect) is maintained. After three changes, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started, and the change suggestion display mode becomes the huge hold display mode.

  Next, in the lower hold prefetching effect, the number of holds is 3, and the third hold in the digestion order is the trigger hold related to the hold prefetching effect. Holding supplementary information that can be executed). Thereafter, with the same change, the second main game side causes a hold to occur, and the execution of the hold split look-ahead effect is stopped by the occurrence of the hold of the second main game side during the execution of the hold split look-ahead effect. After three changes, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started. However, since the execution of the hold split look-ahead effect is stopped, the change suggestion display mode is displayed in “white”.

  In this way, in FIG. 82, even if a hold on the second main game side occurs during the execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect, the giant hold look-ahead effect continues to be executed, while the hold split look-ahead effect is executed. When the second main game side has a hold, the execution of the hold split look-ahead effect is stopped. In addition, when the second main game side has a hold, when a look-ahead effect that can continue execution and a look-ahead effect that stops the execution are provided, (1) execution stop timing of the hold split look-ahead effect (hold split preparation The timing at which the display mode changes to “white”, the timing at which the execution of the hold-split effect is stopped) is when the second main game side causes a hold or when the second main game symbol starts to change, and (2) the non-time-saving game state. Table contents of the variation mode determination table on the first main game side and the variation mode determination table on the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state (variable time that can be selected, whether or not it depends on the number of holds, etc.) (3) The change mode of the trigger hold related to the hold split look-ahead effect does not exist in the change mode determination table of the second main game side. (4) During the execution of the hold split look-ahead effect, Ri specific announcement attraction not run only during the execution of the prefetch effect is executed, it may be configured. In FIG. 82, two prefetching effects, i.e., a giant holding prefetching effect and a hold split prefetching effect, are illustrated as prefetching effects. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The configuration may be applied to the effect. For example, when a hold on the second main game side occurs during execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect, a hold change accompanying execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect (in this example, While the huge preparation hold display mode is maintained, the display of the supplementary information associated with the execution of the giant hold look-ahead effect (in this example, the giant hold provoking effect) may be erased, or the hold change effect may be performed. A similar configuration may be applied to the and the background change effect (when a hold on the second main game side occurs, the hold change is maintained, the background change is erased, or the background change is Maintained That one, pending changes are erased).

(Reservation look-ahead effect change example 20)
Next, FIG. 83 is a modification example 20 of the held look-ahead effect. First, at the top, the number of reservations is one, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a new trigger hold occurs. After one change thereafter, a new hold does not occur and the hold change effect is not executed.

  Next, in the second from the top, the number of reservations is 3, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a new trigger hold occurs. After one change thereafter, no new reservations occur. After two changes thereafter, the pending change effect is not executed.

  Next, in the third from the top, the number of reservations is 3, and the decorative design is fluctuating. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a new trigger hold occurs. One change later, no new reservations have occurred. Thereafter, with the same fluctuation, a new suspension occurs. Thereafter, with the same change, an effect is performed in which the “sheep” skips the blue hold display toward the trigger hold as the first hold change effect in the change. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold at which the blue hold display collides changes from “white” to “blue”. Thereafter, with the same change, an effect is performed in which the “lion” skips the red hold display toward the trigger hold as the second hold change effect in the change. Thereafter, with the same change, the hold display mode of the trigger hold at which the red hold display has collided changes from “blue” to “red”.

  In this manner, in FIG. 83, the execution condition of the hold change effect is executed only when the number of holds is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three) and there is a hold that is digested after the trigger hold. It is configured to be able to. Further, as shown in the drawing, when the look-ahead effect shown in the figure is executed, a plurality of suspension changes can be executed. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration, the change suggestion display change effect (the effect of changing the change suggestion display) is configured to be executable even if the hold number at the time of trigger hold occurrence is less than a predetermined number. Is also good. (1) If only the trigger hold has a hold at the time of trigger hold occurrence, the hold change effect for the trigger hold is not executed. (2) Hold is performed even if no hold occurred after the trigger hold A change effect may be performed. (3) In the case where a hold change effect is executed by a hold change effect even if there is no hold that has occurred after the trigger hold, and in the case where a hold that has occurred after the trigger hold does not exist. A case where the hold change effect is not executed may be provided.

(Other prefetching directing effects)
The configuration of the hold look-ahead effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine in this example will be described in detail below.

(Other prefetching directing effects 1)
When a specific look-ahead effect occurs, the hold display may be erased and the hold change may not be executed during the execution of the look-ahead effect. In addition, when comprised in this way, the said change suggestion display may be displayed and a display mode may be comprised so that change is possible.

(Other pre-reading production 2)
(1) After informing the player of the hold display mode after the hold change, the presence or absence of the hold change is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action (change to the hold display mode informing of the action success). (2) Hold display after the change of hold is not notified to the player, and the presence or absence of the change of the hold is determined according to the success or failure of one hold change action. (3) Hold display after the change of the hold After notifying the player of the plurality of types of hold display modes as candidates of the mode, the hold is changed to one of the candidates of the plurality of types of hold display modes (the hold change to any of the candidates at the time of the action occurrence becomes deterministic). ).

(Other pre-reading effects 3)
(1) A treasure box is displayed as the change suggestion display mode related to a certain symbol change, and the treasure box opens during the certain symbol change and an item appears. (2) A treasure box is displayed at a timing before the item appears. The display may change. (3) When the item does not appear until the super-reach timing (for example, 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the timing before the super-reach (for example, from the start of the fluctuation) The expectation degree of the symbol change may be higher than the case where the item appears at the time when 5 seconds have elapsed).

(Other pre-reading effects 4)
(1) The reserved look-ahead effect is not executed in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced game state. (2) The reserved look-ahead effect is also executed in the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state. Even if it is configured that the execution time of the hold look-ahead effect in the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortened game state is relatively shorter than the execution time of the hold look-ahead effect in a game state other than the shortened game state. Good. In addition, the said structure is applied to the symbol fluctuation of the 2nd main game side at the time of opening time extension function operation (time shortening game state), and when the opening time extension function is not operating (non-time shortening game state), the first configuration is applied. You may comprise so that it may be applied to the symbol change of the main game side.

(Other pending prefetching effects 5)
As the hold display mode, there are a plurality of hold types (the shape of the hold display mode is different when the hold types are different), and a plurality of hold display modes exist in the same hold type (the hold shape is the same or similar. But the display color is different).

(Other pending prefetching effects 6)
(1) When the change suggestion display mode is changed (for example, when the display mode is other than “white”), the pending change is not executed. (2) The change suggestion display mode changes. (For example, when the display mode is other than “white”), the change suggestion display mode is not changed (for example, when the display mode is “white”). It may be configured such that the pending change is difficult to be executed. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to whether or not the symbol change becomes a big hit. In addition, when the change suggestion display mode is changed, a hold change may be performed, but a plurality of hold changes may not be performed for a plurality of hold.

(Other pending prefetching effects 6)
According to a hold display mode related to a certain hold, it is determined to what stage the change suggestion display related to the certain hold changes (for example, the change suggestion display mode related to the “red” hold is It is definitive that the change suggestion display mode of the jackpot expectation degree of “red” or more will be the change suggestion display mode, and that the change suggestion display mode is related to the certain hold regardless of whether the hold display mode is “red”. If the mode does not change to the display mode of “blue” or more, it is definite that the certain symbol change will be a big hit, and if the shape of the hold display mode is “treasure box”, The change suggestion display mode is a display mode having a jackpot expectation of “green” or more, and if the shape of the hold display mode is “safe”, a display in which the change suggestion display mode is a jackpot expectation of “red” or more It is definitive to be an aspect It may be so that configuration.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 7)
(1) The change suggestion display mode (in this example, “rainbow color”) in which the big hit is definite can be displayed, but the hold display mode in which the big hit is definite is not displayed, that is, The indication that the jackpot is definitive can be displayed only with the change suggestion indication. (2) The supplementary information that the jackpot becomes definite or the jackpot is highly expected (the incidental information related to the change suggestion indication) The information is also regarded as the supplementary supplementary information) can be displayed only in the supplementary supplementary information related to the change suggestion display (not displayed in the supplementary supplementary information related to the hold indication), or (3) it is definite that a big hit will be made, or The supplementary information with high expectation of big hits (the supplementary information related to the change suggestion display is also regarded as the supplementary information) is read-ahead fluctuation (digested after the trigger suspension occurs and before the trigger suspension). Not erased during symbol variation) performed according to the hold to be, it may be configured.

(Other pending prefetching effect 8)
After performing a specific hold change, it may be configured so that the hold change is not performed any more. For example, when a big hit such as “rainbow” becomes a definite hold display mode, or “red” In the case of the hold display mode having a high jackpot expectation degree, the hold change is not executed any more (an effect related to the hold look-ahead effect is not executed any more). In addition, the “battle” hold, which is a display mode suggesting the execution of the battle reach effect, and the “pseudo” hold (which may have supplementary information), which is a display mode suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, are no more. The hold does not change, or the supplementary information does not change (not the appearance of new supplementary information, the display form of the supplementary information itself already attached does not change), and the hold display form with the supplementary information attached Only the configuration may be changed.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 9)
During the small hitting game, a hold look-ahead effect (holding change effect, background change effect, etc.) may be executed for the hold occurring before the small hit game starts. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) a transition to the limited frequency state is performed after the small hitting game is completed. Can be executed without doubt during the execution of the small hit game, and the execution probability of the pending change indicating the execution of the reach change can be increased.), (2) )
The hold look-ahead effect performed during the small hit game may be executed other than during the small hit game.

(Other pending prefetching effects 10)
The change suggestion display mode indicates the jackpot expectation degree related to the symbol change (the change) related to the change suggestion display and / or the content of the effect to be executed in the change, and indicates the type of the change suggestion display mode. The number may be greater than the number of types of the hold display mode. It should be noted that, when the type of the change suggestion display is larger, a lot of changes in the change suggestion display mode can be executed at the time of performing the symbol change that is a long change time (executing a plurality of actions, Rank up, etc.). Also, “the number of types of the change suggestion display mode <the number of types of the hold display mode”
It may be configured such that, in such a case, it is possible to focus attention on the change in hold until the symbol change related to trigger hold (the change suggestion display mode is an effect in which a reach effect or the like is the main effect. This is suitable when there is no problem even if the number of types is not large.)

(Other prefetching effects 11)
It has a look-ahead zone that is executed over a plurality of changes in a situation where a trigger hold exists (for example, the background effect is changing), and when the look-ahead zone is used, it is more than the case where the look-ahead zone is not used. May be configured such that the hold change effect is easily executed. Further, it may be configured to have two look-ahead zones, ie, the look-ahead zone A and the look-ahead zone B. In such a case, the stay in the look-ahead zone A is more reserved than the stay in the look-ahead zone B. You may comprise so that a change effect may occur easily. It is preferable that such a configuration is applied to the above-described configuration of the rotation suspension. It can be configured such that the suspension change is easily executed (it easily changes to the suspension display mode of the big hit expectation degree of “blue” or more).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 12)
The above-described hold frame may be displayed, and the display of the hold frame may be changed (hold frame change) every time the hold change effect is executed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, (1) the reserved frame change is not executed during a specific effect such as during super reach, and (2) the change suggestion display is not displayed when the reserved frame change is not executed. However, when the change of the hold frame is executed, the change suggestion display is displayed so as to be more conspicuous to the player than the hold display. (3) The hold display indicating the execution of the hold change (for example, the rotation described above) (Display), the change of the hold frame may not be executed. In addition, (1) when shifting to the change suggestion display with the initial display mode (for example, “white”) (the change suggestion display mode also remains “white”), temporarily The display may be deleted immediately after being displayed, or the display of the change suggestion may not be displayed. Display for a long time (
For example, the display is displayed until the end of the symbol change), and the display mode may further change during the symbol change. (3) In the case of the above (1), the display mode suddenly changes from the initial display mode The change suggestion display mode may be displayed (for example, the display may be changed from non-display to "blue" display).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 13)
In the probability varying gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, there may be a hold in which an effect for prompting the operation of the sub input button is executed. For example, (1) a jackpot with low profit for the player is obtained. The effect of prompting the operation of the sub input button is easier to execute than the hold that is more profitable for the player than the hold, and the change of the hold even if the sub input button is operated at the time of the execution of the effect prompting the operation of the sub input button Difficult to be executed. (2) Executed when an effect prompting the operation of the sub input button is executed, when the effect prompting the operation of the sub input button is not executed, and when a hold change is executed. The background effects to be performed may be different.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 14)
The effect display device and the effect display device are provided with a sub-effect display device (so-called sub-liquid crystal) capable of displaying different effects, and the hold change effect executed by the sub-effect display device, the effect display of the effect display device, There is a pending change effect that is executed in conjunction with the effect display of the effect display device.

(Other pending prefetching effects 15)
By operating the sub input button within the valid period, the change suggestion display causes an action (for example, "chance" display) as many times as it is operated, and the pattern related to the change suggestion display depends on the type of the action. You may comprise so that the big hit expectation of a change may differ.

(Other pending prefetching effects 16)
As a hold change effect that can be executed in the probability change game state and the time reduction game state, two hold displays change adjacently (for example, a hold in the second digestion order and a hold in the third digestion order), and If the symbol change related to the hold that is consumed is a big hit, the profit is relatively high for the player, and if the symbol change related to the hold that is consumed later is a big hit, the profit is relatively high for the player. May be configured to have low profit. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect generation timing of the look-ahead effect is the time of occurrence of a hold to be consumed later. In addition, as the hold change executed in the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state, a symbol change in a situation where the hold of the specific hold display mode remains has a high expectation of a big hit such as a specific notice effect or a reach effect. When an effect occurs (and a big hit), the symbol change is a high profit big hit / the number of rounds is relatively large, and the game shifts to the probability changing game state after the big hit ends (the big hit shifts to the non-probability changing game state after the big hit end) ) May be determined, or the possibility of a high profit big hit may be relatively high.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 17)
As a result of a predetermined effect (for example, a roulette effect), a group A and a group B are provided. If B, a pending change is performed. In addition, when the effect result is the group A, it may be configured to indicate the result of the symbol change.

(Other pending prefetching effects 18)
It may be configured to be able to notify the number of the supplementary supplementary information in advance, for example, to indicate the number of the supplementary supplementary information related to the change suggestion display mode at the time before the suspension related to the change suggestion display is consumed. May be. In addition, the number of displayed supplementary information may decrease during execution of a look-ahead change (a symbol change related to a hold that is digested after the trigger hold occurs and is digested before the trigger hold). May be configured to be relatively low (may be configured to be easily maintained or increased), and to be relatively likely to decrease at the time of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. Further, in such a configuration, it is desirable that the hold display mode and the change suggestion display mode are not changed to the display mode having a low jackpot expectation.

(Other pending prefetching effects 19)
The rate at which the hold change effect is executed for a certain hold is based on the case where the design change related to the certain hold executes the reach change and is a design change that causes loss, and the ratio related to the certain hold. In the case where the symbol variation does not execute the reach variation and the symbol variation is a loss, the former symbol variation related to the certain hold executes the reach variation, and the symbol variation is a loss. It may be configured such that the hold change effect is more easily executed when there is a change. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if there is a hold that will execute reach fluctuation in the hold that is digested before the certain hold, the hold is digested before the certain hold. The hold change effect is more difficult to execute than when there is no hold that causes the reach change to be performed on the hold, or the hold that executes the reach change on the hold that is consumed earlier than the certain hold May be configured so that the hold change effect is not executed when there is a.

(Other pending prefetching effects 20)
When the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold, it may be configured to determine the hold change effect content related to the trigger hold based on the determined effect content at the time of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. Often, in such a case, the holding change effect may be executed at the timing of holding the hold which is used earlier than the trigger hold. In addition, it may be configured that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times with respect to the trigger hold. It is desirable that the change is made so as to change (the jackpot expectation is ranked up). Specifically, the jackpot expectation corresponding to the hold display mode (the sum of the change of the big hit and the change of the loss) The ratio of the appearance rate of the change that becomes a big hit to the appearance rate) is “blue” → 10%, “yellow” → 30%, “red” → 70%, and the hold change effect is performed twice for the trigger hold When executing, when "yellow" is displayed as the hold display mode after the first hold change effect, the hold display mode after the second hold change effect is "red"("blue"). , “Yellow” means big hit expectation Not selected because it does not increase).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 21)
In a gaming machine capable of executing a hold look-ahead effect (hold change effect, etc.), when a hold that becomes a big hit (or a small hit) is exhausted at a timing before a certain hold is exhausted, or When the game state changes, the prefetch information (command related to the prefetch effect) related to the certain hold may be ignored. With such a configuration, when notifying the fluctuation result and the fluctuation mode in advance, when transitioning from the probability fluctuation game state to the non-probability fluctuation game state, or when transitioning from the time reduction game state to the non-time reduction game state In addition, it is possible to prevent execution of a notification that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a change result and / or change mode notified in advance and an actual change result and / or change mode being different. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent troubles between the game store and the player caused by performing display that disappoints expectations. It should be noted that even when the hold that becomes a big hit (or a small hit) is completed at a timing before the certain hold is completed, or when the game state changes, the big hit (or the small hit) If the game state after the hit) is not changed, or if the changed game state does not matter if a prefetch effect can be performed based on the prefetch information related to the certain hold, the prefetch information related to the certain hold (Command related to look-ahead effect) may be used without ignoring it. Note that the transition of the game state includes the end of the probability fluctuation game state due to the elapse of the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the end of the time reduction game state (opening time extension function), and the like. It may be configured to specify in advance (before shifting).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 22)
When a certain hold occurs, a lottery (a lottery in which a certain hold becomes a trigger hold) is performed one or more times as to whether or not to execute the prefetch effect even at the timing after the certain hold occurs, You may be comprised so that a prefetch effect can be performed from the timing which won the said lottery. With such a configuration, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the player cannot determine which hold is the hold that triggered the look-ahead effect, and expects any fluctuation during the look-ahead effect. It has the effect of giving a feeling.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 23)
It has at least a variation mode determination table A and a variation mode determination table B in which the same variation time is easier to select than the variation mode determination table A. May be configured to refer to the variation mode determination table B when the variation mode is determined.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 24)
As a feature of a gaming machine capable of executing a specific notice effect as a look-ahead effect, (1) execution only when the number of reservations is equal to or more than a predetermined number and is within a specific random number lottery random number range and / or a specific fluctuation mode determination random number range. (2) Whether or not a specific announcement effect is performed or the execution probability differs depending on whether a certain hold is the first main game hold or the second main game hold. (3) The main game when the trigger hold occurs When the symbol is changing, the specific notice effect may be executed in a symbol change after the changing symbol during the change.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 25)
A certain hold (for example, trigger hold) has the highest possibility of shifting to the probability-variable gaming state as the hold display mode with the highest jackpot expectation or the gaming state after the end of the big hit (or shifting to the probability-variable gaming state). If the display is displayed in a hold display mode (for example, a hold display mode of “rainbow”), the hold change effect is not executed for the certain hold (the hold of the abnormality). No change is performed).

(Other pending look-ahead effects 26)
It is an image display that can be displayed around the hold display area, and it is possible to display a plurality of types of incidental information that indicates the expectation degree of the symbol change related to trigger hold, and when trigger hold has occurred May be configured to be able to accumulate the supplementary information based on the symbol change related to the hold that is exhausted before the trigger hold and the symbol change related to the trigger hold. In addition, the number of times that the supplementary information is accumulated in one symbol change includes the case where one piece of information is accumulated and the case where a plurality of pieces are accumulated. The total number of additional information to be accumulated may be configured to be larger than that. More specifically, if the fourth hold is a trigger hold and the fraudulent information is stored as in “no storage → one storage → no storage → two storages”, the additional information is displayed. The number of symbol fluctuations stored is two, whereas the total number of additional information stored is three.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 27)
When the hold change effect is executed for the trigger hold and the hold display mode of the trigger hold changes, the symbol change related to the hold that is consumed before the trigger hold becomes a big hit (or a small hit) During the execution of the big hit (or the small hit) and / or after the execution, the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold may be maintained. For example, the big hit (or the small hit) may be configured. When the hit) becomes “16R big hit”, the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold is not maintained (normal hold display mode), and the symbol change related to the trigger hold is “2R big hit” Alternatively, the display of the hold display mode after the change of the trigger hold may be maintained during and / or after the execution of the big hit (or the small hit) when the “small hit” is obtained. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation such as "2R big hit" or "small hit" from impairing a sense of expectation for trigger suspension due to a low profit hit for the player.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 28)
As a prefetching lottery, a prefetching lottery at the time of a prize to execute a prefetching lottery when a hold occurs (when a game ball enters the starting port), and a change start to execute a prefetching lottery at the time of holding out (at the start of a symbol change related to a hold). It is also possible to provide a prefetching lottery at a time, and to execute neither the prefetching lottery at the start of fluctuation nor the prefetching lottery at the time of winning when there is a trigger hold in the hold. In addition, in the next change of the symbol change related to the trigger hold, the prefetch lottery at the start of the change may not be executed, and the prefetch lottery at the time of winning may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that the fluctuation start prefetch lottery can be executed only for the hold not winning the winning prefetch lottery. With such a configuration, the look-ahead effects related to the plurality of trigger suspensions are continuously executed, and other look-ahead effects are not executed during the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the player is currently being executed. It is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that has been started from which symbol change, and to prevent such a situation. The execution timing of the prefetch lottery is not limited to this. For example, the prefetch lottery (variable prefetch lottery) is performed at a timing during the symbol change (for example, a timing after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol change). It may be configured to be executable. In addition, in the case of winning in the variation prefetching lottery, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be changed between before and after the variation prefetching lottery election, or the content of the effect being executed may be changed during the variation. It may be configured to change between before and after the prefetching lottery winning (rewriting at the time of winning of the prefetching lottery in the middle of fluctuation). In addition, when winning the prefetch lottery in the middle of the change, not only rewriting the stop symbol (or the effect to be executed) related to the currently changing symbol change, but also changing the symbol change related to the trigger hold existing in the hold It may be configured to rewrite the stop symbol (or the effect to be executed) in the fluctuation.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 29)
As a pre-reading effect, a reserved pre-reading effect with a pending change effect, and a specific symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (a combination of a plurality of decorative symbols is a specific combination, or only a decorative symbol in a specific column is a special mode. ) May be provided with a specific symbol look-ahead effect that is continuously displayed for a plurality of changes. An effect (announcement effect, background effect, etc.) may be provided.

(Other pre-reading effects 30)
When the player operates the sub input button, it is possible to execute a button effect indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit in the symbol change, and if the prefetching effect is configured to be executable over a plurality of changes, The execution frequency of the button effect in the final change may be higher (the button effect is easily executed) than the execution frequency of the button effect in the change other than the final change of the plurality of changes.

(Other pending prefetching effects 31)
In a gaming machine in which the probability-variation gaming state can be ended by ending a certain number of symbol variations after the end of the special game, a predetermined period (a predetermined number of symbol variations) and a probability-variation gaming state after the transition to the probability variation gaming state. A prefetch lottery or a prefetch effect may not be executed during a specific period (a design change of a specific number of times) before the end. In addition, in the period from the predetermined number of times of change of the probability-variable gaming state to the final change of the probability-variable game state (symbol change that shifts from the next symbol change to the non-probability-variable game state), the prefetch lottery or the prefetch effect is not executed. It may be configured as follows. That is, the look-ahead effect is not executed for the hold scheduled to become the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state. In other words, the symbol fluctuation one fluctuation before the final fluctuation (the symbol fluctuation one rotation before the final fluctuation) is the final fluctuation. Do not execute the look-ahead effect for the hold corresponding to the fluctuation. For example, it may be configured not to execute the change of the hold image corresponding to the last change in the symbol change one change before the last change (for a predetermined period after shifting to the probability change game state, or the end of the big hit). The same applies to pending reservations that sometimes remain). Also, the configuration (for example, a configuration in which the prefetch effect is not executed for the suspension of the final variation) may be applied to the time reduction game state (when the opening extension function is activated). In addition, in the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state (or the time-reduced gaming state), a look-ahead effect (a look-ahead lottery) is performed for a hold scheduled to be consumed (particularly a hold on the second main game side) after the final change. It may be configured not to execute.

(Other pre-reading effects 32)
In the final change in the time-reduced game state (symbol change that shifts from the next symbol change to the non-time-reduced game state), the prefetch lottery (or prefetch effect) may not be executed.

(Other pending look-ahead effects 33)
There is a specific hold display mode that can be displayed only when the number of holds is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three) as the hold display mode. When the specific hold display mode is displayed, a sub-input to the player is given as a notice effect. An effect prompting the operation of the button is executed, and the specific hold display mode is changed to a different hold display mode by operating the sub input button at the time of the effect execution, or the specific hold display mode is configured to act. You may. In addition, the specific hold display mode is configured so that the rate of change in hold at the time of occurrence of the hold is higher than that of other hold display modes after the hold change (hold display modes other than “white”). Note that such a configuration may be configured to be executed only in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state.

(Other pending prefetching effects 34)
The trigger display may be configured such that the hold display and the change suggestion display, the display position and / or the display size of the hold frame are changed when the trigger hold occurs. Further, the display of the hold frame may be continued even when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is being executed and the notice effect is being executed.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiment. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above-described embodiments are added to these concepts, as well as combining and separating the concepts listed (upper concept). You may.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this mode (1)
A starting port into which game balls can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B1)
0),
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to display an attached image which is an image attached to the certain variable right image,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to execute a cooperative effect that is an effect of linking the certain variable right image and a predetermined notice effect,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed in response to execution of the cooperative effect, or the variable right image is attached to the certain variable right image. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to display an accompanying image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (2),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, a display change effect that is an effect indicating or notifying that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is to be changed is executed, and then the mode is changed. Is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
The variable display time of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied is variable according to the number of remaining holds when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied. Is configured to
It has a plurality of display modes as the display mode of the display change effect, and when the display change effect is executed during the change display of the identification information, the display change effect depends on the remaining time until the change display time of the identification information expires. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having different display modes of display change effects.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (3),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
As the type of the display mode of the variable right image, it has at least a first display type and a second display type that is a type different from the first display type,
The first display type has a plurality of display modes of the variable right image,
The display mode belonging to the first display type is configured to be able to change the type of the display mode when the variable right image is shifted and displayed,
The display mode belonging to the second display type is configured such that the type of the display mode cannot be changed or the type of the display mode is harder to change than the first display type when the variable right image is shifted and displayed. And
When a certain variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the change display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the first display type, the certain hold is thereafter identified. When the variable display start condition of the information is satisfied, the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is configured to be displayed in a display mode belonging to the first display type,
When a certain variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the change display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the second display type, the certain hold is thereafter identified. When the variable display start condition of the information is satisfied, the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is configured to be displayed in a display mode belonging to the first display type. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
It is configured to be able to suggest or report the execution expectation of the special game in a display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
It has a plurality of display modes in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
Depending on the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied, the degree of execution expectation of the special game can be different,
The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied is configured to be changeable during the variable display.
The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied has a plurality of types of timings that can be changed during the variable display.
The first timing, the first timing, and the second timing are used to change the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied. At least a second timing which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the timing,
If the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied is changed during the variable display, change at the first timing A pachinko game characterized by being configured to be more easily changed to a display mode indicating that the special game execution expectation degree is relatively higher when the change is performed at the second timing than when the special game is changed. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this mode (5),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be able to be in a specific game state,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
In the normal gaming state, the variable right image can be displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied,
In the case of the specific game state, it is configured not to display the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, or in the specific game state. In some cases, the probability that the variable right image will not be displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is higher than in the normal gaming state. Yes,
A display mode belonging to a specific group among the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image is a display mode for giving notice that the type of the display mode in the variable right image is to be changed during the period in which the variable right image is displayed. Yes,
When a certain variable right image corresponding to a certain hold that does not satisfy the change display start condition of the identification information is displayed in a display mode belonging to the specific group, the certain hold is thereafter changed to the identification information. When the variable display start condition is satisfied, when the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is displayed in a display mode belonging to the specific group, The type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is changed to a display mode indicating the degree of execution expectation of the special game when the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being constituted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (6),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be able to be in a specific game state,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, a display change effect that is an effect indicating or notifying that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is to be changed is executed, and then the mode is changed. Is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
In the normal gaming state, the display change effect is executed when the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed. The display change effect is configured not to be executed when performing, or when the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed in the specific game state, compared with the normal game state. Is configured to increase the probability of not performing
It has at least the effect display mode A and the effect display mode B different from the effect display mode A as the display mode of the display change effect,
In the situation where the game is in the normal gaming state, the display change effect is executed in the effect display mode B rather than when the display change effect is executed in the effect display mode A and the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed. When the type of the display mode in the variable right image is changed after being performed, it is configured to be more easily changed to the display mode indicating that the execution expectation of the special game is relatively high,
Even if the type of the display mode in the variable right image is not changed, the display change effect can be executed, and after the display change effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the type of the display mode in a certain variable right image is changed. Even if it is not changed, the special game is configured to be executed in response to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold corresponding to the certain variable right image. It is a slapstick machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (7),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
A specific type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image is a display mode that gives a notice that it is definitive that a special game will be executed in the future,
When displaying the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, the variable right image is not displayed in the specific type of display mode, but when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to display in the specific type of display mode when displaying a variable right image corresponding to a variable display of identification information to be performed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect (8),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to display an attached image which is an image attached to the certain variable right image,
There are a plurality of types of display modes as the types of incidental images, and a display mode of a specific type among the plurality of types of display modes is a display that gives advance notice that it is almost certain that a special game will be executed in the future. An embodiment,
When displaying the variable right image in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, while the additional image is not attached in the specific type of display mode, the variable display start condition of the identification information is changed. When displaying the variable right image in response to the variable display of the identification information performed when the content is satisfied, it is configured such that an additional image can be attached in the specific type of display mode. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, a display change effect that is an effect indicating or notifying that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is to be changed is executed, and then the mode is changed. Is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
When a display change effect is executed within the variable display time of certain identification information, the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold can be changed for the hold remaining within the variable display time. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by having.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect (10),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub game unit (for example, for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)
And a sub-control board S).
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The display device includes at least a display mode A and a display mode B that is a display mode different from the display mode A, as the plurality of types of display modes in the variable right image,
The expected degree of execution of the special game related to the suspension corresponding to the variable right image displayed in the display mode B is higher than the expected degree of execution of the special game related to the reservation corresponding to the variable right image displayed in the display mode A. Is configured to be higher,
As a preview effect displayed during the change display of the identification information, at least a preview effect A and a preview effect B that is a different preview effect from the preview effect A,
It is configured such that the expected degree of execution of the special game related to the variable display in which the notice effect B is executed is relatively higher than the expected degree of execution of the special game related to the variable display in which the notice effect A is executed. ,
The display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the hold of the next scheduled use, and the change is displayed when the hold is exhausted and the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied. The display mode B is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the suspension of the next digestion schedule, rather than the execution expectation of the special game in the case where the announcement effect A is displayed in the middle. When the preliminary display effect A is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information when the fluctuation display start condition of the identification information regarding the hold is satisfied, the execution expectation of the special game is higher,
The display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the hold of the next scheduled use, and the change is displayed when the hold is exhausted and the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied. The display mode A is displayed as the display mode of the variable right image corresponding to the hold of the next digestion schedule, and the execution expectation of the special game in the case where the notice effect B is displayed in the middle is displayed. It is configured to be higher than the execution expectation of the special game when the notice effect B is displayed during the fluctuation display of the identification information when the change display start condition of the identification information regarding the hold is satisfied. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (11),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
In the case where there is a certain hold and a first-use hold that satisfies the identification information change display start condition earlier than the certain hold, the first-order hold-related identification information change display start condition is satisfied. During the variable display of the identification information at the time, it is possible to execute a hold look-ahead effect that gives a notice of the expected degree of execution of a future special game due to the remaining hold during the variable display of the identification information,
The degree of expectation as to whether or not the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is changed depends on whether or not the change of the identification information when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the previous digestion hold is satisfied. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be different depending on whether or not the hold look-ahead effect is performed and / or the content of the hold look-ahead effect.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
If the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the specific display mode, the variable display of the identification information is started during the variable display. It is configured so that the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the condition is not changed, or corresponds to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied When the display mode in the variable right image is the specific display mode, the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is the specific display mode. It is more difficult to change the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information than in the case where Being configured,
The number of types of display modes in the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied is changed according to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of display modes in the right image is increased.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., the effect display device SG) can be changed according to the operation mode of an operation member (e.g., the sub input button SB) that can be operated by the player,
The operation member (for example, at least a first operation mode and a second operation mode different from the first operation mode as an operation mode of the sub input button SB,
During the period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, when the operation mode of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB is performed in the first operation mode, the display mode in the certain variable right image) Is configured to be able to change the type of
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, when the operation member (for example, the operation mode with the sub input button SB is performed in the second operation mode, the display mode in the certain variable right image) Is configured to be able to change the type of
When the type of display mode in the variable right image is changed by the first operation mode, the execution expectation degree of the special game suggested in the display mode after the change, and the type of display mode in the variable right image by the second operation mode The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the degree of execution expectation of the special game indicated in the display mode after the change is different from that of the special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
During a period in which a certain variable right image is displayed, it is configured to be able to display an attached image which is an image attached to the certain variable right image,
The first display type and the first display type are different from the first display type as a type of the additional image attached to the variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the identification information performed when the variable information start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Has at least a certain second display type,
There are a plurality of display modes of the auxiliary image as the second display type,
The additional image is displayed, thereby indicating the degree of expectation of the execution of the special game based on the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the additional image, or executed during the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the additional image. It is configured to suggest the content of the production,
The variation of the identification information corresponding to the supplementary image is higher when the supplementary image is displayed in the display mode of the second display type than when the supplementary image is displayed in the display mode of the first display type. Expectation of the execution of the special game based on the display, or, the effect content executed during the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the incidental image is configured to be easily recognized by the player,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display mode of the accompanying image during the change display of the identification information is configured to be changeable from the display mode of the first display type to the display mode of the second display type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present mode (15),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, a display change effect that is an effect indicating or notifying that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is to be changed is executed, and then the mode is changed. Is configured to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
As the execution condition of the display change effect corresponding to a certain variable right image, when the number of suspensions at the time when the certain variable right image is newly displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the display corresponding to the certain variable right image A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a display change effect.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
The effect display unit (for example, effect display) displays a variable right image that is an image object that is newly displayed when a new suspension occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. Device SG), and has a plurality of types of display modes as the display mode of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed Is configured to be changeable,
The variable right image can be displayed in response to the hold that does not satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information, and the variable right image can be displayed even when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. It is configured to be able to display variable rights images,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, a display change effect that is an effect indicating or notifying that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is to be changed is executed, and then the mode is changed. Is configured to change the type of display mode in the variable right image,
As the execution condition of the display change effect corresponding to a certain variable right image, when the number of suspensions at the time when the certain variable right image is newly displayed is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the display corresponding to the certain variable right image It is configured to be able to execute a display change effect,
During a variable display period of a certain identification information, a display change effect corresponding to a variable right image corresponding to the variable display of the certain identification information performed when a variable display start condition of the certain identification information is satisfied is performed a plurality of times. It may be a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be executable.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect (16),
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A), the obtained first random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the condition for starting the variable display of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information on the game symbol display section A21g). -C) and
A second random number acquiring means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10); ,
When the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means (for example, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the obtained second random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage unit (for example, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second holding to occur;
In the case where the condition for starting the variable display of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section B21g). -C) and
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) is advantageous to the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can be in a state of
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT), and has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and after the execution of the special game Is configured to be able to be in a specific game state,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
Directing and displaying a variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new first hold or a second hold occurs and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. And a plurality of types of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode as a display mode of the variable right image. It is configured to be able to change the type of display mode in the certain variable right image during a certain period,
In a situation where the display mode in a certain variable right image is a special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group of the predetermined group, and a special game is executed. In this case, the certain variable right image after the end of the special game is configured to have a special display mode,
In a situation in which the display mode in a certain variable right image is a special display mode, the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a group other than the specific group of the predetermined group, and is displayed in a special mode. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that, when a game is executed, the certain variable right image after the end of the special game has a normal display mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect (17),
A starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a start port (for example, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10). Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the random numbers are obtained by the random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A, the second main game random number obtaining determining executing means MJ21-B), the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage unit (for example, a first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing the obtained random numbers until a hold occurs.
When the variable display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information display unit (for example, the first main unit) is performed based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g and the second main game symbol display section B21g. Control means MP11-C);
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
In the case where there is a certain hold and a first digestion hold which is a hold that satisfies the identification information change display start condition earlier than the certain hold, the change display start condition of the identification information related to the first digestion hold exists. During the fluctuation display of the identification information when satisfying, it is possible to execute a hold look-ahead effect that foretells the future special game execution expectation due to the certain hold,
As the hold look-ahead effect, the hold look-ahead effect A, the hold look-ahead effect B in which the effect execution mode is different from the hold look-ahead effect A, and the hold look-ahead effect C in which the hold look-ahead effect A and the hold look-ahead effect B have different effect execution modes. And at least
The pending look-ahead effect A and the pending look-ahead effect B are configured not to be executed simultaneously,
The prefetch effect B and the prefetch effect C are configured to be able to be simultaneously executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect (18),
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the production display on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG),
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
A first random number acquisition unit (for example, a first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10); ,
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A), the obtained first random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information relating to the certain first hold is satisfied, a pass / fail judgment is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and a first judgment is performed based on the result of the judgment. First identification information display control means (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and then displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first main game symbol display unit A21g. First and second main game symbol control means MP11-C),
A second random number acquiring means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10); ,
When the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means (for example, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the obtained second random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage unit (for example, a second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second holding to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, and a second determination is performed based on the result of the determination. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section. )When,
Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group. When,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side MT) and
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a ball into a second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state, and can be set to a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game. It is configured as
If the second hold has occurred, it is configured not to satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the first hold,
The sub game unit (for example, sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display content control means (for example, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)) , Effect display control means SM20).
A variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new first hold has occurred and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, is displayed on the effect display unit. And a plurality of display modes including at least a normal display mode and a special display mode different from the normal display mode as a display mode of the variable right image, and a period during which a certain variable right image is displayed In which the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is configured to be changeable,
In the case where there is a first hold and a first hold which is a first hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the first identification information earlier than the certain first hold, the first hold During the fluctuation display of the first identification information when the condition for starting the fluctuation display of the identification information is satisfied, a hold look-ahead effect for notifying the expected degree of execution of a special game in the future due to the certain first suspension is executed. Is possible,
In the normal gaming state, a special display mode is displayed as a display mode in a variable right image related to a certain first hold, and a hold look-ahead effect is being executed, and a new second hold is performed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display of the special display mode is maintained when the occurrence occurs, and the execution of the reserved look-ahead effect is stopped.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A First main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-B Second main game start entrance ball judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance ball judging means MJ11-C10 First big win entrance ball judgment Means, MJ11-C20 Second winning game entrance judgment means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Hold control means, MJ31 Hold digestion control means MJ31j Variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 Symbol holding means MJ32-A First main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol holding information temporary Storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B Second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding Means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 success / failure lottery means MN11-A first main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game success / failure lottery table MN11-B second Main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game success / failure lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Supplementary game success / failure lottery table MN20 Special game shift decision means, MN40 Symbol content decision means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Variation mode determination Dan, MN51-A First main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MN52 limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, MN52c limited frequency counter AMN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, MN 52b Limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11- H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H For auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management Timer MP20-B Second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP22t-B Second main game starting port electric accessory opening timer, MP30 Special Game control means MP31 Condition determination means, MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table, MP33 Special game execution means MP33-C First and second big winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34 Special Game time management means, MP34t Special game timer MP40 Small hit game control means, MP41t Small hit game timer MP40b Small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probable change end condition judgment means, MP52 Time saving end condition judgment Means MP52c Time saving counter, MB Game state temporary record Means MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H Temporary auxiliary game pattern information storage Means MB20b Special game-related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout determination means A First main game peripheral device, A10 First main game start port A11s First main game start entrance detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display portion, A21h First main game symbol hold display portion B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main Game starting port B11s Second main game starting port incoming ball detection device, B11d Second main game starting port electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21 2nd main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display section, C first and second main game shared peripheral devices C10 1st big winning opening, C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory, C20 second big winning opening C21s second big winning opening winning detection device, C21d second big winning opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game starting opening H11s auxiliary game starting opening ball detecting device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main-side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative design display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b installation diagram related information temporary storage means SM21t Schematic variation time management timer SM22 Schematic pending information display control means, SM22b Schematic pending information temporary storage means SM26 Reservation pre-reading effect execution control means, SM26k Reservation pre-fetching effect execution availability determination means SM26b Pre-fetching related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determining means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awake stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notification effect display content determining means SM24b Preliminary effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determining means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) ), SS10 sub-information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative design display area, SG12 first reserved display section SG13 second reserved display section KH Award Ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting port that allows game balls to enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main game section for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit capable of displaying effects,
A sub-game unit for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main game department
A random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the starting port,
When a random number is obtained by the random number obtaining unit, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage unit that controls generation of a hold is provided.
In the case where the change display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, a determination is made based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the identification information is changed by the identification information display unit based on the result of the determination. Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the identification information after being displayed,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the sub game unit side to the sub game unit side,
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, comprising effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The variable right image, which is an image object that is newly displayed when a new hold has occurred and that is shifted and displayed when the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, can be displayed on the effect display unit. There is a plurality of types of display modes of the variable right image, and the type of the display mode in the certain variable right image can be changed during the period in which the certain variable right image is displayed. ,
In the case where there is a certain hold and the first digest hold which satisfies the variable display start condition of the identification information earlier than the certain hold, the first variable display condition of the identification information related to the first digest hold is satisfied During the fluctuation display of the identification information at the time, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that foretells the future special game execution expectation due to the certain hold,
The degree of expectation that the type of the display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the certain hold is changed is a look-ahead effect during the variable display of the identification information when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the first digestion hold is satisfied. It is configured to be different depending on the execution status and / or the execution content of the look-ahead effect ,
When changing the type of display mode in a certain variable right image, it is configured to be able to execute a special effect that is an effect that suggests or informs that the type of display mode in the certain variable right image is changed,
It is configured such that the variable display time of the identification information when the number of holdings when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the hold number A can be X seconds, and when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied. When the number of holds is the hold number B smaller than the hold number A, the change display time of the identification information can be set to Y seconds longer than X seconds,
During the variable display of the identification information for X seconds when the number of holds when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the number of holds A, a certain type of variable right image corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute special effects,
During the variable display of the identification information for Y seconds when the number of holds when the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information is satisfied is the hold number B, the remaining time for the variable display of the identification information is X seconds or more. Even if a new suspension occurs, the certain type of special effect is not executed on the variable right image corresponding to the new suspension, but the following variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the type of display mode in the variable right image corresponding to the new suspension can be changed as an opportunity.

Images